hg man page on Kali

Man page or keyword search:  
man Server   9211 pages
apropos Keyword Search (all sections)
Output format
Kali logo
[printable version]

HG(1)			       Mercurial Manual				 HG(1)

NAME
       hg - Mercurial source code management system

SYNOPSIS
       hg command [option]... [argument]...

DESCRIPTION
       The  hg command provides a command line interface to the Mercurial sys‐
       tem.

COMMAND ELEMENTS
       files...
	      indicates one or more filename or relative path  filenames;  see
	      File Name Patterns for information on pattern matching

       path   indicates a path on the local machine

       revision
	      indicates	 a  changeset  which  can  be specified as a changeset
	      revision number, a tag, or a unique substring of	the  changeset
	      hash value

       repository path
	      either the pathname of a local repository or the URI of a remote
	      repository.

OPTIONS
       -R,--repository <REPO>
	      repository root directory or name of overlay bundle file

       --cwd <DIR>
	      change working directory

       -y, --noninteractive
	      do not prompt, automatically  pick  the  first  choice  for  all
	      prompts

       -q, --quiet
	      suppress output

       -v, --verbose
	      enable additional output

       --color <TYPE>
	      when to colorize (boolean, always, auto, never, or debug)

       --config <CONFIG[+]>
	      set/override config option (use 'section.name=value')

       --debug
	      enable debugging output

       --debugger
	      start debugger

       --encoding <ENCODE>
	      set the charset encoding (default: UTF-8)

       --encodingmode <MODE>
	      set the charset encoding mode (default: strict)

       --traceback
	      always print a traceback on exception

       --time time how long the command takes

       --profile
	      print command execution profile

       --version
	      output version information and exit

       -h, --help
	      display help and exit

       --hidden
	      consider hidden changesets

       --pager <TYPE>
	      when  to	paginate  (boolean,  always, auto, or never) (default:
	      auto)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

COMMANDS
   add
       add the specified files on the next commit:

       hg add [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Schedule files to be version controlled and added to the repository.

       The files will be added to the repository at the next commit.  To  undo
       an add before that, see hg forget.

       If  no  names  are given, add all files to the repository (except files
       matching .hgignore).

       Examples:

	  · New (unknown) files are added automatically by hg add:

	    $ ls
	    foo.c
	    $ hg status
	    ? foo.c
	    $ hg add
	    adding foo.c
	    $ hg status
	    A foo.c

	  · Specific files to be added can be specified:

	    $ ls
	    bar.c  foo.c
	    $ hg status
	    ? bar.c
	    ? foo.c
	    $ hg add bar.c
	    $ hg status
	    A bar.c
	    ? foo.c

       Returns 0 if all files are successfully added.

       Options:

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       -S, --subrepos
	      recurse into subrepositories

       -n, --dry-run
	      do not perform actions, just print output

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   addremove
       add all new files, delete all missing files:

       hg addremove [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Add all new files and remove all missing files from the repository.

       Unless names are given, new files are ignored if they match any of  the
       patterns	 in  .hgignore.	 As with add, these changes take effect at the
       next commit.

       Use the -s/--similarity option to detect	 renamed  files.  This	option
       takes  a percentage between 0 (disabled) and 100 (files must be identi‐
       cal) as its parameter. With a parameter greater than 0,	this  compares
       every  removed  file  with  every  added file and records those similar
       enough as renames. Detecting renamed files this way can	be  expensive.
       After  using this option, hg status -C can be used to check which files
       were identified as moved or renamed. If not specified,  -s/--similarity
       defaults to 100 and only renames of identical files are detected.

       Examples:

	  · A  number  of  files (bar.c and foo.c) are new, while foobar.c has
	    been removed (without using hg remove) from the repository:

	    $ ls
	    bar.c foo.c
	    $ hg status
	    ! foobar.c
	    ? bar.c
	    ? foo.c
	    $ hg addremove
	    adding bar.c
	    adding foo.c
	    removing foobar.c
	    $ hg status
	    A bar.c
	    A foo.c
	    R foobar.c

	  · A file foobar.c was	 moved	to  foo.c  without  using  hg  rename.
	    Afterwards, it was edited slightly:

	    $ ls
	    foo.c
	    $ hg status
	    ! foobar.c
	    ? foo.c
	    $ hg addremove --similarity 90
	    removing foobar.c
	    adding foo.c
	    recording removal of foobar.c as rename to foo.c (94% similar)
	    $ hg status -C
	    A foo.c
	      foobar.c
	    R foobar.c

       Returns 0 if all files are successfully added.

       Options:

       -s,--similarity <SIMILARITY>
	      guess renamed files by similarity (0<=s<=100)

       -S, --subrepos
	      recurse into subrepositories

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       -n, --dry-run
	      do not perform actions, just print output

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   annotate
       show changeset information by line for each file:

       hg annotate [-r REV] [-f] [-a] [-u] [-d] [-n] [-c] [-l] FILE...

       List  changes  in  files,  showing the revision id responsible for each
       line.

       This command is useful for discovering when a change was	 made  and  by
       whom.

       If  you	include --file, --user, or --date, the revision number is sup‐
       pressed unless you also include --number.

       Without the -a/--text option, annotate will avoid processing  files  it
       detects	as  binary.  With  -a, annotate will annotate the file anyway,
       although the results will probably be neither useful nor desirable.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV>
	      annotate the specified revision

       --follow
	      follow copies/renames and list the filename (DEPRECATED)

       --no-follow
	      don't follow copies and renames

       -a, --text
	      treat all files as text

       -u, --user
	      list the author (long with -v)

       -f, --file
	      list the filename

       -d, --date
	      list the date (short with -q)

       -n, --number
	      list the revision number (default)

       -c, --changeset
	      list the changeset

       -l, --line-number
	      show line number at the first appearance

       --skip <REV[+]>
	      revision to not display (EXPERIMENTAL)

       -w, --ignore-all-space
	      ignore white space when comparing lines

       -b, --ignore-space-change
	      ignore changes in the amount of white space

       -B, --ignore-blank-lines
	      ignore changes whose lines are all blank

       -Z, --ignore-space-at-eol
	      ignore changes in whitespace at EOL

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

	  aliases: blame

   archive
       create an unversioned archive of a repository revision:

       hg archive [OPTION]... DEST

       By default, the revision used is the parent of the  working  directory;
       use -r/--rev to specify a different revision.

       The  archive type is automatically detected based on file extension (to
       override, use -t/--type).

       Examples:

       · create a zip file containing the 1.0 release:

	 hg archive -r 1.0 project-1.0.zip

       · create a tarball excluding .hg files:

	 hg archive project.tar.gz -X ".hg*"

       Valid types are:

       files

	      a directory full of files (default)

       tar

	      tar archive, uncompressed

       tbz2

	      tar archive, compressed using bzip2

       tgz

	      tar archive, compressed using gzip

       uzip

	      zip archive, uncompressed

       zip

	      zip archive, compressed using deflate

       The exact name of the destination archive or directory is given using a
       format string; see hg help export for details.

       Each  member added to an archive file has a directory prefix prepended.
       Use -p/--prefix to specify a format string for the prefix. The  default
       is the basename of the archive, with suffixes removed.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       --no-decode
	      do not pass files through decoders

       -p,--prefix <PREFIX>
	      directory prefix for files in archive

       -r,--rev <REV>
	      revision to distribute

       -t,--type <TYPE>
	      type of distribution to create

       -S, --subrepos
	      recurse into subrepositories

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   backout
       reverse effect of earlier changeset:

       hg backout [OPTION]... [-r] REV

       Prepare	a  new	changeset with the effect of REV undone in the current
       working directory. If no conflicts were encountered, it will be commit‐
       ted immediately.

       If  REV is the parent of the working directory, then this new changeset
       is committed automatically (unless --no-commit is specified).

       Note   hg backout cannot be used to fix either an unwanted or incorrect
	      merge.

       Examples:

       · Reverse  the  effect  of  the	parent of the working directory.  This
	 backout will be committed immediately:

	 hg backout -r .

       · Reverse the effect of previous bad revision 23:

	 hg backout -r 23

       · Reverse the effect of previous bad  revision  23  and	leave  changes
	 uncommitted:

	 hg backout -r 23 --no-commit
	 hg commit -m "Backout revision 23"

       By  default,  the pending changeset will have one parent, maintaining a
       linear history. With --merge, the pending changeset will	 instead  have
       two parents: the old parent of the working directory and a new child of
       REV that simply undoes REV.

       Before version 1.7, the behavior	 without  --merge  was	equivalent  to
       specifying  --merge followed by hg update --clean . to cancel the merge
       and leave the child of REV as a head to be merged separately.

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       See hg help revert for a way to restore files to the state  of  another
       revision.

       Returns	0  on success, 1 if nothing to backout or there are unresolved
       files.

       Options:

       --merge
	      merge with old dirstate parent after backout

       --commit
	      commit if no conflicts were encountered (DEPRECATED)

       --no-commit
	      do not commit

       --parent <REV>
	      parent to choose when backing out merge (DEPRECATED)

       -r,--rev <REV>
	      revision to backout

       -e, --edit
	      invoke editor on commit messages

       -t,--tool <VALUE>
	      specify merge tool

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       -m,--message <TEXT>
	      use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
	      read commit message from file

       -d,--date <DATE>
	      record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
	      record the specified user as committer

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   bisect
       subdivision search of changesets:

       hg bisect [-gbsr] [-U] [-c CMD] [REV]

       This command helps to find changesets which introduce problems. To use,
       mark  the earliest changeset you know exhibits the problem as bad, then
       mark the latest changeset which is  free	 from  the  problem  as	 good.
       Bisect  will  update  your  working directory to a revision for testing
       (unless the -U/--noupdate option is specified). Once you have performed
       tests,  mark  the  working  directory  as  good or bad, and bisect will
       either update to another candidate changeset or announce	 that  it  has
       found the bad revision.

       As  a  shortcut, you can also use the revision argument to mark a revi‐
       sion as good or bad without checking it out first.

       If you supply a command, it will be used for automatic bisection.   The
       environment variable HG_NODE will contain the ID of the changeset being
       tested. The exit status of the command will be used to  mark  revisions
       as  good	 or  bad: status 0 means good, 125 means to skip the revision,
       127 (command not	 found)	 will  abort  the  bisection,  and  any	 other
       non-zero exit status means the revision is bad.

       Some examples:

       · start a bisection with known bad revision 34, and good revision 12:

	 hg bisect --bad 34
	 hg bisect --good 12

       · advance  the current bisection by marking current revision as good or
	 bad:

	 hg bisect --good
	 hg bisect --bad

       · mark the current revision, or a known revision, to be	skipped	 (e.g.
	 if that revision is not usable because of another issue):

	 hg bisect --skip
	 hg bisect --skip 23

       · skip all revisions that do not touch directories foo or bar:

	 hg bisect --skip "!( file('path:foo') & file('path:bar') )"

       · forget the current bisection:

	 hg bisect --reset

       · use 'make && make tests' to automatically find the first broken revi‐
	 sion:

	 hg bisect --reset
	 hg bisect --bad 34
	 hg bisect --good 12
	 hg bisect --command "make && make tests"

       · see all changesets whose states are  already  known  in  the  current
	 bisection:

	 hg log -r "bisect(pruned)"

       · see the changeset currently being bisected (especially useful if run‐
	 ning with -U/--noupdate):

	 hg log -r "bisect(current)"

       · see all changesets that took part in the current bisection:

	 hg log -r "bisect(range)"

       · you can even get a nice graph:

	 hg log --graph -r "bisect(range)"

       See hg help revisions.bisect for more about the bisect() predicate.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -r, --reset
	      reset bisect state

       -g, --good
	      mark changeset good

       -b, --bad
	      mark changeset bad

       -s, --skip
	      skip testing changeset

       -e, --extend
	      extend the bisect range

       -c,--command <CMD>
	      use command to check changeset state

       -U, --noupdate
	      do not update to target

   bookmarks
       create a new bookmark or list existing bookmarks:

       hg bookmarks [OPTIONS]... [NAME]...

       Bookmarks are labels on changesets to help track lines of  development.
       Bookmarks  are  unversioned  and	 can  be  moved,  renamed and deleted.
       Deleting or moving a bookmark has no effect on the  associated  change‐
       sets.

       Creating	 or updating to a bookmark causes it to be marked as 'active'.
       The active bookmark is indicated with a '*'.  When a  commit  is	 made,
       the  active bookmark will advance to the new commit.  A plain hg update
       will also advance an active bookmark, if possible.  Updating away  from
       a bookmark will cause it to be deactivated.

       Bookmarks  can  be  pushed and pulled between repositories (see hg help
       push and hg help pull). If  a  shared  bookmark	has  diverged,	a  new
       'divergent  bookmark' of the form 'name@path' will be created. Using hg
       merge will resolve the divergence.

       Specifying bookmark as '.' to -m or -d options is equivalent to	speci‐
       fying the active bookmark's name.

       A  bookmark named '@' has the special property that hg clone will check
       it out by default if it exists.

       Examples:

       · create an active bookmark for a new line of development:

	 hg book new-feature

       · create an inactive bookmark as a place marker:

	 hg book -i reviewed

       · create an inactive bookmark on another changeset:

	 hg book -r .^ tested

       · rename bookmark turkey to dinner:

	 hg book -m turkey dinner

       · move the '@' bookmark from another branch:

	 hg book -f @

       Options:

       -f, --force
	      force

       -r,--rev <REV>
	      revision for bookmark action

       -d, --delete
	      delete a given bookmark

       -m,--rename <OLD>
	      rename a given bookmark

       -i, --inactive
	      mark a bookmark inactive

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

	      aliases: bookmark

   branch
       set or show the current branch name:

       hg branch [-fC] [NAME]

       Note   Branch names are permanent and global. Use hg bookmark to create
	      a	 light-weight  bookmark instead. See hg help glossary for more
	      information about named branches and bookmarks.

       With no argument, show the current branch name. With one argument,  set
       the  working  directory	branch	name (the branch will not exist in the
       repository until the next commit). Standard  practice  recommends  that
       primary development take place on the 'default' branch.

       Unless  -f/--force  is  specified, branch will not let you set a branch
       name that already exists.

       Use -C/--clean to reset the working directory branch  to	 that  of  the
       parent of the working directory, negating a previous branch change.

       Use  the command hg update to switch to an existing branch. Use hg com‐
       mit --close-branch to mark this branch head as closed.  When all	 heads
       of a branch are closed, the branch will be considered closed.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -f, --force
	      set branch name even if it shadows an existing branch

       -C, --clean
	      reset branch name to parent branch name

   branches
       list repository named branches:

       hg branches [-c]

       List  the  repository's named branches, indicating which ones are inac‐
       tive. If -c/--closed is specified, also list branches which  have  been
       marked closed (see hg commit --close-branch).

       Use the command hg update to switch to an existing branch.

       Returns 0.

       Options:

       -a, --active
	      show only branches that have unmerged heads (DEPRECATED)

       -c, --closed
	      show normal and closed branches

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

   bundle
       create a bundle file:

       hg bundle [-f] [-t BUNDLESPEC] [-a] [-r REV]... [--base REV]... FILE [DEST]

       Generate a bundle file containing data to be added to a repository.

       To  create  a bundle containing all changesets, use -a/--all (or --base
       null). Otherwise, hg assumes the destination will have  all  the	 nodes
       you  specify  with  --base  parameters.	Otherwise,  hg will assume the
       repository has all the nodes in destination, or default-push/default if
       no destination is specified.

       You  can	 change	 bundle	 format with the -t/--type option. See hg help
       bundlespec for documentation on	this  format.  By  default,  the  most
       appropriate format is used and compression defaults to bzip2.

       The  bundle  file  can then be transferred using conventional means and
       applied to another repository with the unbundle or pull	command.  This
       is useful when direct push and pull are not available or when exporting
       an entire repository is undesirable.

       Applying bundles preserves all  changeset  contents  including  permis‐
       sions, copy/rename information, and revision history.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if no changes found.

       Options:

       -f, --force
	      run even when the destination is unrelated

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      a changeset intended to be added to the destination

       -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
	      a specific branch you would like to bundle

       --base <REV[+]>
	      a base changeset assumed to be available at the destination

       -a, --all
	      bundle all changesets in the repository

       -t,--type <TYPE>
	      bundle compression type to use (default: bzip2)

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
	      specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
	      specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
	      do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   cat
       output the current or given revision of files:

       hg cat [OPTION]... FILE...

       Print  the  specified  files  as they were at the given revision. If no
       revision is given, the parent of the working directory is used.

       Output may be to a file, in which case the name of the  file  is	 given
       using a format string. The formatting rules as follows:

       %%

	      literal "%" character

       %s

	      basename of file being printed

       %d

	      dirname of file being printed, or '.' if in repository root

       %p

	      root-relative path name of file being printed

       %H

	      changeset hash (40 hexadecimal digits)

       %R

	      changeset revision number

       %h

	      short-form changeset hash (12 hexadecimal digits)

       %r

	      zero-padded changeset revision number

       %b

	      basename of the exporting repository

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -o,--output <FORMAT>
	      print output to file with formatted name

       -r,--rev <REV>
	      print the given revision

       --decode
	      apply any matching decode filter

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   clone
       make a copy of an existing repository:

       hg clone [OPTION]... SOURCE [DEST]

       Create a copy of an existing repository in a new directory.

       If no destination directory name is specified, it defaults to the base‐
       name of the source.

       The location of the source is added to the  new	repository's  .hg/hgrc
       file, as the default to be used for future pulls.

       Only  local  paths  and	ssh:// URLs are supported as destinations. For
       ssh:// destinations, no working directory or .hg/hgrc will  be  created
       on the remote side.

       If  the	source repository has a bookmark called '@' set, that revision
       will be checked out in the new repository by default.

       To check out a particular version, use -u/--update, or -U/--noupdate to
       create a clone with no working directory.

       To  pull	 only  a  subset  of changesets, specify one or more revisions
       identifiers with -r/--rev or branches with -b/--branch.	The  resulting
       clone  will  contain only the specified changesets and their ancestors.
       These options (or 'clone src#rev dest') imply --pull,  even  for	 local
       source repositories.

       In normal clone mode, the remote normalizes repository data into a com‐
       mon exchange format and the receiving end translates this data into its
       local  storage  format.	--stream activates a different clone mode that
       essentially copies repository files from the remote with	 minimal  data
       processing.  This  significantly	 reduces  the CPU cost of a clone both
       remotely and locally.  However, it often increases the transferred data
       size  by	 30-40%.  This can result in substantially faster clones where
       I/O throughput is plentiful,  especially	 for  larger  repositories.  A
       side-effect  of	--stream  clones is that storage settings and require‐
       ments on the remote are applied locally: a modern  client  may  inherit
       legacy  or inefficient storage used by the remote or a legacy Mercurial
       client may not be able to clone from a modern Mercurial remote.

       Note   Specifying a tag will include the tagged changeset but  not  the
	      changeset containing the tag.

       For  efficiency, hardlinks are used for cloning whenever the source and
       destination are on the same filesystem (note this applies only  to  the
       repository  data, not to the working directory). Some filesystems, such
       as AFS, implement hardlinking incorrectly, but do not report errors. In
       these cases, use the --pull option to avoid hardlinking.

       Mercurial  will	update	the  working directory to the first applicable
       revision from this list:

       a. null if -U or the source repository has no changesets

       b. if -u . and the source repository is local, the first parent of  the
	  source repository's working directory

       c. the  changeset  specified  with -u (if a branch name, this means the
	  latest head of that branch)

       d. the changeset specified with -r

       e. the tipmost head specified with -b

       f. the tipmost head specified with the url#branch source syntax

       g. the revision marked with the '@' bookmark, if present

       h. the tipmost head of the default branch

       i. tip

       When cloning from servers that support it, Mercurial may fetch pre-gen‐
       erated  data  from  a  server-advertised	 URL. When this is done, hooks
       operating on incoming changesets and changegroups may fire twice,  once
       for the bundle fetched from the URL and another for any additional data
       not fetched from this URL. In addition, if an error occurs, the reposi‐
       tory may be rolled back to a partial clone. This behavior may change in
       future releases. See hg help -e clonebundles for more.

       Examples:

       · clone a remote repository to a new directory named hg/:

	 hg clone https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/

       · create a lightweight local clone:

	 hg clone project/ project-feature/

       · clone from an absolute path on an ssh server (note double-slash):

	 hg clone ssh://user@server//home/projects/alpha/

       · do a streaming clone while checking out a specified version:

	 hg clone --stream http://server/repo -u 1.5

       · create a repository without changesets after a particular revision:

	 hg clone -r 04e544 experimental/ good/

       · clone (and track) a particular named branch:

	 hg clone https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/#stable

       See hg help urls for details on specifying URLs.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -U, --noupdate
	      the clone will include an empty working directory (only a repos‐
	      itory)

       -u,--updaterev <REV>
	      revision, tag, or branch to check out

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      include the specified changeset

       -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
	      clone only the specified branch

       --pull use pull protocol to copy metadata

       --uncompressed
	      an alias to --stream (DEPRECATED)

       --stream
	      clone with minimal data processing

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
	      specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
	      specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
	      do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   commit
       commit the specified files or all outstanding changes:

       hg commit [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Commit  changes	to  the given files into the repository. Unlike a cen‐
       tralized SCM, this operation is a local operation. See  hg  push for  a
       way to actively distribute your changes.

       If  a  list of files is omitted, all changes reported by hg status will
       be committed.

       If you are committing the result of a merge, do not provide  any	 file‐
       names or -I/-X filters.

       If  no  commit  message	is specified, Mercurial starts your configured
       editor where you can enter a message. In case your  commit  fails,  you
       will find a backup of your message in .hg/last-message.txt.

       The  --close-branch  flag  can  be used to mark the current branch head
       closed. When all heads of a branch are closed, the branch will be  con‐
       sidered closed and no longer listed.

       The  --amend flag can be used to amend the parent of the working direc‐
       tory with a new commit that contains the changes in the parent in addi‐
       tion  to	 those	currently reported by hg status, if there are any. The
       old commit is stored in a backup bundle	in  .hg/strip-backup  (see  hg
       help bundle and hg help unbundle on how to restore it).

       Message,	 user and date are taken from the amended commit unless speci‐
       fied. When a message isn't specified on the command  line,  the	editor
       will open with the message of the amended commit.

       It  is  not possible to amend public changesets (see hg help phases) or
       changesets that have children.

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if nothing changed.

       Examples:

       · commit all files ending in .py:

	 hg commit --include "set:**.py"

       · commit all non-binary files:

	 hg commit --exclude "set:binary()"

       · amend the current commit and set the date to now:

	 hg commit --amend --date now

       Options:

       -A, --addremove
	      mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing

       --close-branch
	      mark a branch head as closed

       --amend
	      amend the parent of the working directory

       -s, --secret
	      use the secret phase for committing

       -e, --edit
	      invoke editor on commit messages

       -i, --interactive
	      use interactive mode

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       -m,--message <TEXT>
	      use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
	      read commit message from file

       -d,--date <DATE>
	      record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
	      record the specified user as committer

       -S, --subrepos
	      recurse into subrepositories

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

	  aliases: ci

   config
       show combined config settings from all hgrc files:

       hg config [-u] [NAME]...

       With no arguments, print names and values of all config items.

       With one argument of the form section.name, print  just	the  value  of
       that config item.

       With  multiple  arguments,  print  names and values of all config items
       with matching section names.

       With --edit, start an  editor  on  the  user-level  config  file.  With
       --global,  edit	the  system-wide  config  file. With --local, edit the
       repository-level config file.

       With --debug, the source (filename and line number) is printed for each
       config item.

       See hg help config for more information about config files.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if NAME does not exist.

       Options:

       -u, --untrusted
	      show untrusted configuration options

       -e, --edit
	      edit user config

       -l, --local
	      edit repository config

       -g, --global
	      edit global config

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

	      aliases: showconfig debugconfig

   copy
       mark files as copied for the next commit:

       hg copy [OPTION]... [SOURCE]... DEST

       Mark  dest  as  having  copies of source files. If dest is a directory,
       copies are put in that directory. If dest is a file, the source must be
       a single file.

       By  default, this command copies the contents of files as they exist in
       the working directory. If invoked with  -A/--after,  the	 operation  is
       recorded, but no copying is performed.

       This  command  takes effect with the next commit. To undo a copy before
       that, see hg revert.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if errors are encountered.

       Options:

       -A, --after
	      record a copy that has already occurred

       -f, --force
	      forcibly copy over an existing managed file

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       -n, --dry-run
	      do not perform actions, just print output

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

	  aliases: cp

   diff
       diff repository (or selected files):

       hg diff [OPTION]... ([-c REV] | [-r REV1 [-r REV2]]) [FILE]...

       Show differences between revisions for the specified files.

       Differences between files are shown using the unified diff format.

       Note   hg diff may generate unexpected results for merges, as  it  will
	      default  to comparing against the working directory's first par‐
	      ent changeset if no revisions are specified.

       When two revision arguments are given, then changes are	shown  between
       those  revisions.  If only one revision is specified then that revision
       is compared to the working directory, and, when no revisions are speci‐
       fied, the working directory files are compared to its first parent.

       Alternatively  you  can	specify -c/--change with a revision to see the
       changes in that changeset relative to its first parent.

       Without the -a/--text option, diff will avoid generating diffs of files
       it detects as binary. With -a, diff will generate a diff anyway, proba‐
       bly with undesirable results.

       Use the -g/--git option to generate diffs in the git extended diff for‐
       mat. For more information, read hg help diffs.

       Examples:

       · compare a file in the current working directory to its parent:

	 hg diff foo.c

       · compare two historical versions of a directory, with rename info:

	 hg diff --git -r 1.0:1.2 lib/

       · get change stats relative to the last change on some date:

	 hg diff --stat -r "date('may 2')"

       · diff all newly-added files that contain a keyword:

	 hg diff "set:added() and grep(GNU)"

       · compare a revision and its parents:

	 hg diff -c 9353	 # compare against first parent
	 hg diff -r 9353^:9353	 # same using revset syntax
	 hg diff -r 9353^2:9353	 # compare against the second parent

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      revision

       -c,--change <REV>
	      change made by revision

       -a, --text
	      treat all files as text

       -g, --git
	      use git extended diff format

       --binary
	      generate binary diffs in git mode (default)

       --nodates
	      omit dates from diff headers

       --noprefix
	      omit a/ and b/ prefixes from filenames

       -p, --show-function
	      show which function each change is in

       --reverse
	      produce a diff that undoes the changes

       -w, --ignore-all-space
	      ignore white space when comparing lines

       -b, --ignore-space-change
	      ignore changes in the amount of white space

       -B, --ignore-blank-lines
	      ignore changes whose lines are all blank

       -Z, --ignore-space-at-eol
	      ignore changes in whitespace at EOL

       -U,--unified <NUM>
	      number of lines of context to show

       --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes

       --root <DIR>
	      produce diffs relative to subdirectory

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       -S, --subrepos
	      recurse into subrepositories

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   export
       dump the header and diffs for one or more changesets:

       hg export [OPTION]... [-o OUTFILESPEC] [-r] [REV]...

       Print  the changeset header and diffs for one or more revisions.	 If no
       revision is given, the parent of the working directory is used.

       The information shown in the changeset header is: author, date,	branch
       name (if non-default), changeset hash, parent(s) and commit comment.

       Note   hg  export may generate unexpected diff output for merge change‐
	      sets, as it will compare the merge changeset against  its	 first
	      parent only.

       Output  may  be	to a file, in which case the name of the file is given
       using a format string. The formatting rules are as follows:

       %%

	      literal "%" character

       %H

	      changeset hash (40 hexadecimal digits)

       %N

	      number of patches being generated

       %R

	      changeset revision number

       %b

	      basename of the exporting repository

       %h

	      short-form changeset hash (12 hexadecimal digits)

       %m

	      first line of the commit message (only alphanumeric characters)

       %n

	      zero-padded sequence number, starting at 1

       %r

	      zero-padded changeset revision number

       Without the -a/--text option, export will  avoid	 generating  diffs  of
       files  it  detects as binary. With -a, export will generate a diff any‐
       way, probably with undesirable results.

       Use the -g/--git option to generate diffs in the git extended diff for‐
       mat. See hg help diffs for more information.

       With  the  --switch-parent  option, the diff will be against the second
       parent. It can be useful to review a merge.

       Examples:

       · use export and import to transplant a bugfix to the current branch:

	 hg export -r 9353 | hg import -

       · export all the changesets between two revisions to a file with rename
	 information:

	 hg export --git -r 123:150 > changes.txt

       · split	outgoing  changes  into	 a  series of patches with descriptive
	 names:

	 hg export -r "outgoing()" -o "%n-%m.patch"

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -o,--output <FORMAT>
	      print output to file with formatted name

       --switch-parent
	      diff against the second parent

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      revisions to export

       -a, --text
	      treat all files as text

       -g, --git
	      use git extended diff format

       --binary
	      generate binary diffs in git mode (default)

       --nodates
	      omit dates from diff headers

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   files
       list tracked files:

       hg files [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Print files under Mercurial control in the working directory or	speci‐
       fied  revision for given files (excluding removed files).  Files can be
       specified as filenames or filesets.

       If no files are given to match, this command prints the	names  of  all
       files under Mercurial control.

       Examples:

       · list all files under the current directory:

	 hg files .

       · shows sizes and flags for current revision:

	 hg files -vr .

       · list all files named README:

	 hg files -I "**/README"

       · list all binary files:

	 hg files "set:binary()"

       · find files containing a regular expression:

	 hg files "set:grep('bob')"

       · search tracked file contents with xargs and grep:

	 hg files -0 | xargs -0 grep foo

       See hg help patterns and hg help filesets for more information on spec‐
       ifying file patterns.

       Returns 0 if a match is found, 1 otherwise.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV>
	      search the repository as it is in REV

       -0, --print0
	      end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

       -S, --subrepos
	      recurse into subrepositories

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   forget
       forget the specified files on the next commit:

       hg forget [OPTION]... FILE...

       Mark the specified files so they will no longer be  tracked  after  the
       next commit.

       This  only  removes  files from the current branch, not from the entire
       project history, and it does not delete them from  the  working	direc‐
       tory.

       To delete the file from the working directory, see hg remove.

       To undo a forget before the next commit, see hg add.

       Examples:

       · forget newly-added binary files:

	 hg forget "set:added() and binary()"

       · forget files that would be excluded by .hgignore:

	 hg forget "set:hgignore()"

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   graft
       copy changes from other branches onto the current branch:

       hg graft [OPTION]... [-r REV]... REV...

       This  command  uses  Mercurial's merge logic to copy individual changes
       from other branches without merging branches in the history graph. This
       is  sometimes  known  as 'backporting' or 'cherry-picking'. By default,
       graft will copy user, date, and description from the source changesets.

       Changesets that are  ancestors  of  the	current	 revision,  that  have
       already been grafted, or that are merges will be skipped.

       If --log is specified, log messages will have a comment appended of the
       form:

       (grafted from CHANGESETHASH)

       If --force is specified, revisions will be grafted  even	 if  they  are
       already	ancestors  of, or have been grafted to, the destination.  This
       is useful when the revisions have since been backed out.

       If a graft merge results in conflicts, the graft process is interrupted
       so that the current merge can be manually resolved.  Once all conflicts
       are addressed, the graft process can be continued  with	the  -c/--con‐
       tinue option.

       Note   The  -c/--continue  option  does	not  reapply  earlier options,
	      except for --force.

       Examples:

       · copy a single change to the stable branch and edit its description:

	 hg update stable
	 hg graft --edit 9393

       · graft a range of changesets with one exception, updating dates:

	 hg graft -D "2085::2093 and not 2091"

       · continue a graft after resolving conflicts:

	 hg graft -c

       · show the source of a grafted changeset:

	 hg log --debug -r .

       · show revisions sorted by date:

	 hg log -r "sort(all(), date)"

       See hg help revisions for more about specifying revisions.

       Returns 0 on successful completion.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      revisions to graft

       -c, --continue
	      resume interrupted graft

       -e, --edit
	      invoke editor on commit messages

       --log  append graft info to log message

       -f, --force
	      force graft

       -D, --currentdate
	      record the current date as commit date

       -U, --currentuser
	      record the current user as committer

       -d,--date <DATE>
	      record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
	      record the specified user as committer

       -t,--tool <VALUE>
	      specify merge tool

       -n, --dry-run
	      do not perform actions, just print output

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   grep
       search revision history for a pattern in specified files:

       hg grep [OPTION]... PATTERN [FILE]...

       Search revision history for a regular expression in the specified files
       or the entire project.

       By  default,  grep prints the most recent revision number for each file
       in which it finds a match. To get it to print every revision that  con‐
       tains  a	 change	 in  match  status  ("-"  for  a  match that becomes a
       non-match, or "+" for a non-match that becomes a match), use the	 --all
       flag.

       PATTERN can be any Python (roughly Perl-compatible) regular expression.

       If no FILEs are specified (and -f/--follow isn't set), all files in the
       repository are searched, including those that don't exist in  the  cur‐
       rent branch or have been deleted in a prior changeset.

       Returns 0 if a match is found, 1 otherwise.

       Options:

       -0, --print0
	      end fields with NUL

       --all  print all revisions that match

       -a, --text
	      treat all files as text

       -f, --follow
	      follow  changeset	 history,  or  file  history across copies and
	      renames

       -i, --ignore-case
	      ignore case when matching

       -l, --files-with-matches
	      print only filenames and revisions that match

       -n, --line-number
	      print matching line numbers

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      only search files changed within revision range

       -u, --user
	      list the author (long with -v)

       -d, --date
	      list the date (short with -q)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   heads
       show branch heads:

       hg heads [-ct] [-r STARTREV] [REV]...

       With no arguments, show	all  open  branch  heads  in  the  repository.
       Branch  heads  are  changesets  that  have  no  descendants on the same
       branch. They are where development generally takes place	 and  are  the
       usual targets for update and merge operations.

       If  one	or more REVs are given, only open branch heads on the branches
       associated with the specified changesets are shown. This means that you
       can  use	 hg  heads  . to  see  the  heads on the currently checked-out
       branch.

       If -c/--closed is specified, also show branch heads marked closed  (see
       hg commit --close-branch).

       If  STARTREV  is	 specified,  only  those heads that are descendants of
       STARTREV will be displayed.

       If -t/--topo is specified, named branch mechanics will be  ignored  and
       only topological heads (changesets with no children) will be shown.

       Returns 0 if matching heads are found, 1 if not.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <STARTREV>
	      show only heads which are descendants of STARTREV

       -t, --topo
	      show topological heads only

       -a, --active
	      show active branchheads only (DEPRECATED)

       -c, --closed
	      show normal and closed branch heads

       --style <STYLE>
	      display using template map file (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template

   help
       show help for a given topic or a help overview:

       hg help [-ecks] [TOPIC]

       With no arguments, print a list of commands with short help messages.

       Given a topic, extension, or command name, print help for that topic.

       Returns 0 if successful.

       Options:

       -e, --extension
	      show only help for extensions

       -c, --command
	      show only help for commands

       -k, --keyword
	      show topics matching keyword

       -s,--system <VALUE[+]>
	      show help for specific platform(s)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   identify
       identify the working directory or specified revision:

       hg identify [-nibtB] [-r REV] [SOURCE]

       Print  a	 summary  identifying the repository state at REV using one or
       two parent hash identifiers, followed by a "+" if the working directory
       has  uncommitted	 changes,  the branch name (if not default), a list of
       tags, and a list of bookmarks.

       When REV is not given, print a summary of  the  current	state  of  the
       repository.

       Specifying  a  path to a repository root or Mercurial bundle will cause
       lookup to operate on that repository/bundle.

       Examples:

       · generate a build identifier for the working directory:

	 hg id --id > build-id.dat

       · find the revision corresponding to a tag:

	 hg id -n -r 1.3

       · check the most recent revision of a remote repository:

	 hg id -r tip https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/

       See hg log for generating more information  about  specific  revisions,
       including full hash identifiers.

       Returns 0 if successful.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV>
	      identify the specified revision

       -n, --num
	      show local revision number

       -i, --id
	      show global revision id

       -b, --branch
	      show branch

       -t, --tags
	      show tags

       -B, --bookmarks
	      show bookmarks

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
	      specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
	      specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
	      do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

	      aliases: id

   import
       import an ordered set of patches:

       hg import [OPTION]... PATCH...

       Import a list of patches and commit them individually (unless --no-com‐
       mit is specified).

       To read a patch from standard input (stdin), use "-" as the patch name.
       If a URL is specified, the patch will be downloaded from there.

       Import  first applies changes to the working directory (unless --bypass
       is specified), import will abort if there are outstanding changes.

       Use --bypass to apply and commit patches directly  to  the  repository,
       without	affecting the working directory. Without --exact, patches will
       be applied on top of the working directory parent revision.

       You can import a patch straight from a mail message.  Even  patches  as
       attachments work (to use the body part, it must have type text/plain or
       text/x-patch). From and Subject headers of email message	 are  used  as
       default	committer and commit message. All text/plain body parts before
       first diff are added to the commit message.

       If the imported patch was generated by hg export, user and  description
       from  patch override values from message headers and body. Values given
       on command line with -m/--message and -u/--user override these.

       If --exact is specified, import will set the working directory  to  the
       parent  of each patch before applying it, and will abort if the result‐
       ing changeset has a different ID than the one recorded  in  the	patch.
       This  will  guard  against various ways that portable patch formats and
       mail systems might fail to transfer Mercurial data or metadata. See  hg
       bundle for lossless transmission.

       Use --partial to ensure a changeset will be created from the patch even
       if some hunks fail to apply. Hunks that fail to apply will  be  written
       to  a  <target-file>.rej	 file.	Conflicts can then be resolved by hand
       before hg commit --amend is run to update the created  changeset.  This
       flag  exists  to let people import patches that partially apply without
       losing the associated metadata (author, date, description, ...).

       Note   When no hunks apply cleanly, hg import --partial will create  an
	      empty changeset, importing only the patch metadata.

       With -s/--similarity, hg will attempt to discover renames and copies in
       the patch in the same way as hg addremove.

       It is possible to use external patch programs to perform the  patch  by
       setting	the  ui.patch  configuration  option. For the default internal
       tool, the fuzz can also be configured via patch.fuzz.  See hg help con‐
       fig for more information about configuration files and how to use these
       options.

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       Examples:

       · import a traditional patch from a website and detect renames:

	 hg import -s 80 http://example.com/bugfix.patch

       · import a changeset from an hgweb server:

	 hg import https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/rev/5ca8c111e9aa

       · import all the patches in an Unix-style mbox:

	 hg import incoming-patches.mbox

       · import patches from stdin:

	 hg import -

       · attempt to exactly restore an exported changeset (not	always	possi‐
	 ble):

	 hg import --exact proposed-fix.patch

       · use  an  external  tool  to  apply a patch which is too fuzzy for the
	 default internal tool.

	    hg import --config ui.patch="patch --merge" fuzzy.patch

       · change the default fuzzing from 2 to a less strict 7

	    hg import --config ui.fuzz=7 fuzz.patch

       Returns 0 on success, 1 on partial success (see --partial).

       Options:

       -p,--strip <NUM>
	      directory strip option for patch. This has the same  meaning  as
	      the corresponding patch option (default: 1)

       -b,--base <PATH>
	      base path (DEPRECATED)

       -e, --edit
	      invoke editor on commit messages

       -f, --force
	      skip check for outstanding uncommitted changes (DEPRECATED)

       --no-commit
	      don't commit, just update the working directory

       --bypass
	      apply patch without touching the working directory

       --partial
	      commit even if some hunks fail

       --exact
	      abort if patch would apply lossily

       --prefix <DIR>
	      apply patch to subdirectory

       --import-branch
	      use any branch information in patch (implied by --exact)

       -m,--message <TEXT>
	      use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
	      read commit message from file

       -d,--date <DATE>
	      record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
	      record the specified user as committer

       -s,--similarity <SIMILARITY>
	      guess renamed files by similarity (0<=s<=100)

	      aliases: patch

   incoming
       show new changesets found in source:

       hg incoming [-p] [-n] [-M] [-f] [-r REV]... [--bundle FILENAME] [SOURCE]

       Show new changesets found in the specified path/URL or the default pull
       location. These are the changesets that would have been	pulled	by  hg
       pull at the time you issued this command.

       See pull for valid source format details.

       With  -B/--bookmarks,  the  result of bookmark comparison between local
       and remote repositories is displayed. With -v/--verbose, status is also
       displayed for each bookmark like below:

       BM1		 01234567890a added
       BM2		 1234567890ab advanced
       BM3		 234567890abc diverged
       BM4		 34567890abcd changed

       The  action  taken  locally  when pulling depends on the status of each
       bookmark:

       added

	      pull will create it

       advanced

	      pull will update it

       diverged

	      pull will create a divergent bookmark

       changed

	      result depends on remote changesets

       From the point of view of pulling behavior, bookmark existing  only  in
       the  remote  repository	are  treated  as  added, even if it is in fact
       locally deleted.

       For remote repository, using --bundle avoids downloading the changesets
       twice if the incoming is followed by a pull.

       Examples:

       · show incoming changes with patches and full description:

	 hg incoming -vp

       · show incoming changes excluding merges, store a bundle:

	 hg in -vpM --bundle incoming.hg
	 hg pull incoming.hg

       · briefly list changes inside a bundle:

	 hg in changes.hg -T "{desc|firstline}\n"

       Returns 0 if there are incoming changes, 1 otherwise.

       Options:

       -f, --force
	      run even if remote repository is unrelated

       -n, --newest-first
	      show newest record first

       --bundle <FILE>
	      file to store the bundles into

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      a remote changeset intended to be added

       -B, --bookmarks
	      compare bookmarks

       -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
	      a specific branch you would like to pull

       -p, --patch
	      show patch

       -g, --git
	      use git extended diff format

       -l,--limit <NUM>
	      limit number of changes displayed

       -M, --no-merges
	      do not show merges

       --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes

       -G, --graph
	      show the revision DAG

       --style <STYLE>
	      display using template map file (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
	      specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
	      specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
	      do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       -S, --subrepos
	      recurse into subrepositories

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

	  aliases: in

   init
       create a new repository in the given directory:

       hg init [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [DEST]

       Initialize a new repository in the given directory. If the given direc‐
       tory does not exist, it will be created.

       If no directory is given, the current directory is used.

       It is possible to specify an ssh:// URL as  the	destination.   See  hg
       help urls for more information.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
	      specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
	      specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
	      do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

   locate
       locate files matching specific patterns (DEPRECATED):

       hg locate [OPTION]... [PATTERN]...

       Print  files  under  Mercurial  control	in the working directory whose
       names match the given patterns.

       By default, this command searches all directories in the working direc‐
       tory.  To search just the current directory and its subdirectories, use
       "--include .".

       If no patterns are given to match, this command prints the names of all
       files under Mercurial control in the working directory.

       If  you	want  to feed the output of this command into the "xargs" com‐
       mand, use the -0 option to both this command  and  "xargs".  This  will
       avoid  the  problem  of	"xargs" treating single filenames that contain
       whitespace as multiple filenames.

       See hg help files for a more versatile command.

       Returns 0 if a match is found, 1 otherwise.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV>
	      search the repository as it is in REV

       -0, --print0
	      end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs

       -f, --fullpath
	      print complete paths from the filesystem root

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   log
       show revision history of entire repository or files:

       hg log [OPTION]... [FILE]

       Print the revision  history  of	the  specified	files  or  the	entire
       project.

       If no revision range is specified, the default is tip:0 unless --follow
       is set, in which case the working  directory  parent  is	 used  as  the
       starting revision.

       File  history  is  shown	 without  following  rename or copy history of
       files. Use -f/--follow with a filename to follow history across renames
       and  copies.  --follow  without	a filename will only show ancestors or
       descendants of the starting revision.

       By default this command prints revision number and changeset id,	 tags,
       non-trivial  parents,  user, date and time, and a summary for each com‐
       mit. When the -v/--verbose switch is used, the list  of	changed	 files
       and full commit message are shown.

       With  --graph the revisions are shown as an ASCII art DAG with the most
       recent changeset at the top.  'o' is a  changeset,  '@'	is  a  working
       directory  parent, 'x' is obsolete, and '+' represents a fork where the
       changeset from the lines below is a parent of the 'o' merge on the same
       line.  Paths in the DAG are represented with '|', '/' and so forth. ':'
       in place of a '|' indicates one or more revisions in a path  are	 omit‐
       ted.

       Use  -L/--line-range  FILE,M:N  options	to follow the history of lines
       from M to N in FILE. With -p/--patch only diff hunks  affecting	speci‐
       fied line range will be shown. This option requires --follow; it can be
       specified multiple times. Currently, this option is not compatible with
       --graph. This option is experimental.

       Note   hg  log  --patch may  generate  unexpected diff output for merge
	      changesets, as it will only compare the merge changeset  against
	      its  first  parent. Also, only files different from BOTH parents
	      will appear in files:.

       Note   For performance reasons, hg log FILE may omit duplicate  changes
	      made  on branches and will not show removals or mode changes. To
	      see all such changes, use the --removed switch.

       Note   The history resulting from -L/--line-range  options  depends  on
	      diff  options; for instance if white-spaces are ignored, respec‐
	      tive changes with only white-spaces in specified line range will
	      not be listed.

       Some examples:

       · changesets with full descriptions and file lists:

	 hg log -v

       · changesets ancestral to the working directory:

	 hg log -f

       · last 10 commits on the current branch:

	 hg log -l 10 -b .

       · changesets showing all modifications of a file, including removals:

	 hg log --removed file.c

       · all changesets that touch a directory, with diffs, excluding merges:

	 hg log -Mp lib/

       · all revision numbers that match a keyword:

	 hg log -k bug --template "{rev}\n"

       · the full hash identifier of the working directory parent:

	 hg log -r . --template "{node}\n"

       · list available log templates:

	 hg log -T list

       · check if a given changeset is included in a tagged release:

	 hg log -r "a21ccf and ancestor(1.9)"

       · find all changesets by some user in a date range:

	 hg log -k alice -d "may 2008 to jul 2008"

       · summary of all changesets after the last tag:

	 hg log -r "last(tagged())::" --template "{desc|firstline}\n"

       · changesets touching lines 13 to 23 for file.c:

	 hg log -L file.c,13:23

       · changesets  touching  lines  13  to 23 for file.c and lines 2 to 6 of
	 main.c with patch:

	 hg log -L file.c,13:23 -L main.c,2:6 -p

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       See hg help revisions for more about specifying and ordering revisions.

       See hg help templates for more about pre-packaged styles and specifying
       custom  templates.  The default template used by the log command can be
       customized via the ui.logtemplate configuration setting.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -f, --follow
	      follow changeset history, or  file  history  across  copies  and
	      renames

       --follow-first
	      only follow the first parent of merge changesets (DEPRECATED)

       -d,--date <DATE>
	      show revisions matching date spec

       -C, --copies
	      show copied files

       -k,--keyword <TEXT[+]>
	      do case-insensitive search for a given text

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      show the specified revision or revset

       -L,--line-range <FILE,RANGE[+]>
	      follow line range of specified file (EXPERIMENTAL)

       --removed
	      include revisions where files were removed

       -m, --only-merges
	      show only merges (DEPRECATED)

       -u,--user <USER[+]>
	      revisions committed by user

       --only-branch <BRANCH[+]>
	      show only changesets within the given named branch (DEPRECATED)

       -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
	      show changesets within the given named branch

       -P,--prune <REV[+]>
	      do not display revision or any of its ancestors

       -p, --patch
	      show patch

       -g, --git
	      use git extended diff format

       -l,--limit <NUM>
	      limit number of changes displayed

       -M, --no-merges
	      do not show merges

       --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes

       -G, --graph
	      show the revision DAG

       --style <STYLE>
	      display using template map file (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

	  aliases: history

   manifest
       output the current or given revision of the project manifest:

       hg manifest [-r REV]

       Print a list of version controlled files for the given revision.	 If no
       revision is given, the first parent of the working directory  is	 used,
       or the null revision if no revision is checked out.

       With  -v,  print	 file  permissions, symlink and executable bits.  With
       --debug, print file revision hashes.

       If option --all is specified, the list of all files from all  revisions
       is printed. This includes deleted and renamed files.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV>
	      revision to display

       --all  list files from all revisions

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

   merge
       merge another revision into working directory:

       hg merge [-P] [[-r] REV]

       The  current  working directory is updated with all changes made in the
       requested revision since the last common predecessor revision.

       Files that changed between either parent are marked as changed for  the
       next  commit  and a commit must be performed before any further updates
       to the repository are allowed. The next commit will have two parents.

       --tool can be used to specify the merge tool used for file  merges.  It
       overrides  the  HGMERGE	environment  variable  and  your configuration
       files. See hg help merge-tools for options.

       If no revision is specified, the working directory's parent is  a  head
       revision,  and  the current branch contains exactly one other head, the
       other head is merged with by default. Otherwise, an  explicit  revision
       with which to merge with must be provided.

       See hg help resolve for information on handling file conflicts.

       To  undo an uncommitted merge, use hg update --clean . which will check
       out a clean copy of the original merge parent, losing all changes.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if there are unresolved files.

       Options:

       -f, --force
	      force a merge including outstanding changes (DEPRECATED)

       -r,--rev <REV>
	      revision to merge

       -P, --preview
	      review revisions to merge (no merge is performed)

       -t,--tool <VALUE>
	      specify merge tool

   outgoing
       show changesets not found in the destination:

       hg outgoing [-M] [-p] [-n] [-f] [-r REV]... [DEST]

       Show changesets not found in the specified  destination	repository  or
       the  default  push  location.  These  are  the changesets that would be
       pushed if a push was requested.

       See pull for details of valid destination formats.

       With -B/--bookmarks, the result of bookmark  comparison	between	 local
       and remote repositories is displayed. With -v/--verbose, status is also
       displayed for each bookmark like below:

       BM1		 01234567890a added
       BM2			      deleted
       BM3		 234567890abc advanced
       BM4		 34567890abcd diverged
       BM5		 4567890abcde changed

       The action taken when pushing depends on the status of each bookmark:

       added

	      push with -B will create it

       deleted

	      push with -B will delete it

       advanced

	      push will update it

       diverged

	      push with -B will update it

       changed

	      push with -B will update it

       From the point of view of pushing behavior, bookmarks existing only  in
       the  remote  repository	are  treated as deleted, even if it is in fact
       added remotely.

       Returns 0 if there are outgoing changes, 1 otherwise.

       Options:

       -f, --force
	      run even when the destination is unrelated

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      a changeset intended to be included in the destination

       -n, --newest-first
	      show newest record first

       -B, --bookmarks
	      compare bookmarks

       -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
	      a specific branch you would like to push

       -p, --patch
	      show patch

       -g, --git
	      use git extended diff format

       -l,--limit <NUM>
	      limit number of changes displayed

       -M, --no-merges
	      do not show merges

       --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes

       -G, --graph
	      show the revision DAG

       --style <STYLE>
	      display using template map file (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
	      specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
	      specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
	      do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       -S, --subrepos
	      recurse into subrepositories

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

	  aliases: out

   parents
       show the parents of the working directory or revision (DEPRECATED):

       hg parents [-r REV] [FILE]

       Print the working directory's parent revisions. If a revision is	 given
       via  -r/--rev,  the parent of that revision will be printed.  If a file
       argument is given, the revision in which	 the  file  was	 last  changed
       (before	the  working  directory	 revision  or the argument to --rev if
       given) is printed.

       This command is equivalent to:

       hg log -r "p1()+p2()" or
       hg log -r "p1(REV)+p2(REV)" or
       hg log -r "max(::p1() and file(FILE))+max(::p2() and file(FILE))" or
       hg log -r "max(::p1(REV) and file(FILE))+max(::p2(REV) and file(FILE))"

       See hg summary and hg help revsets for related information.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV>
	      show parents of the specified revision

       --style <STYLE>
	      display using template map file (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template

   paths
       show aliases for remote repositories:

       hg paths [NAME]

       Show definition of symbolic path name NAME. If no name is  given,  show
       definition of all available names.

       Option  -q/--quiet  suppresses  all  output when searching for NAME and
       shows only the path names when listing all definitions.

       Path names are defined in the [paths]  section  of  your	 configuration
       file  and  in /etc/mercurial/hgrc. If run inside a repository, .hg/hgrc
       is used, too.

       The path names default and default-push have a special  meaning.	  When
       performing  a  push or pull operation, they are used as fallbacks if no
       location is specified on the command-line.  When default-push  is  set,
       it  will	 be used for push and default will be used for pull; otherwise
       default is used as the fallback for both.  When cloning	a  repository,
       the clone source is written as default in .hg/hgrc.

       Note   default and default-push apply to all inbound (e.g.  hg incoming
	      ) and outbound (e.g. hg outgoing, hg email and hg bundle) opera‐
	      tions.

       See hg help urls for more information.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

   phase
       set or show the current phase name:

       hg phase [-p|-d|-s] [-f] [-r] [REV...]

       With no argument, show the phase name of the current revision(s).

       With  one  of  -p/--public, -d/--draft or -s/--secret, change the phase
       value of the specified revisions.

       Unless -f/--force is specified, hg phase won't move changesets  from  a
       lower phase to a higher phase. Phases are ordered as follows:

       public < draft < secret

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if some phases could not be changed.

       (For more information about the phases concept, see hg help phases.)

       Options:

       -p, --public
	      set changeset phase to public

       -d, --draft
	      set changeset phase to draft

       -s, --secret
	      set changeset phase to secret

       -f, --force
	      allow to move boundary backward

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      target revision

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   pull
       pull changes from the specified source:

       hg pull [-u] [-f] [-r REV]... [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [SOURCE]

       Pull changes from a remote repository to a local one.

       This finds all changes from the repository at the specified path or URL
       and adds them to a local repository (the current one unless -R is spec‐
       ified). By default, this does not update the copy of the project in the
       working directory.

       Use hg incoming if you want to see what would have been added by a pull
       at  the	time  you issued this command. If you then decide to add those
       changes to the repository, you should use hg pull -r X where X  is  the
       last changeset listed by hg incoming.

       If  SOURCE  is  omitted,	 the 'default' path will be used.  See hg help
       urls for more information.

       Specifying bookmark as . is equivalent to specifying the	 active	 book‐
       mark's name.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if an update had unresolved files.

       Options:

       -u, --update
	      update to new branch head if changesets were pulled

       -f, --force
	      run even when remote repository is unrelated

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      a remote changeset intended to be added

       -B,--bookmark <BOOKMARK[+]>
	      bookmark to pull

       -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
	      a specific branch you would like to pull

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
	      specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
	      specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
	      do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   push
       push changes to the specified destination:

       hg push [-f] [-r REV]... [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [DEST]

       Push changesets from the local repository to the specified destination.

       This operation is symmetrical to pull: it is identical to a pull in the
       destination repository from the current one.

       By default, push will not allow creation of new heads at	 the  destina‐
       tion,  since multiple heads would make it unclear which head to use. In
       this situation, it is recommended to pull and merge before pushing.

       Use --new-branch if you want to allow push to create a new named branch
       that  is not present at the destination. This allows you to only create
       a new branch without forcing other changes.

       Note   Extra care should be taken with  the  -f/--force	option,	 which
	      will  push  all  new heads on all branches, an action which will
	      almost always cause confusion for collaborators.

       If -r/--rev is used, the specified revision and all its ancestors  will
       be pushed to the remote repository.

       If -B/--bookmark is used, the specified bookmarked revision, its ances‐
       tors, and the bookmark will be pushed to the remote repository.	Speci‐
       fying . is equivalent to specifying the active bookmark's name.

       Please  see  hg	help  urls for important details about ssh:// URLs. If
       DESTINATION is omitted, a default path will be used.

       The --pushvars option sends strings to the server that become  environ‐
       ment  variables	prepended  with	 HG_USERVAR_.  For example, --pushvars
       ENABLE_FEATURE=true, provides  the  server  side	 hooks	with  HG_USER‐
       VAR_ENABLE_FEATURE=true as part of their environment.

       pushvars	 can  provide  for user-overridable hooks as well as set debug
       levels. One example is having a hook  that  blocks  commits  containing
       conflict markers, but enables the user to override the hook if the file
       is using conflict markers for testing purposes or the file  format  has
       strings that look like conflict markers.

       By  default,  servers will ignore --pushvars. To enable it add the fol‐
       lowing to your configuration file:

       [push]
       pushvars.server = true

       Returns 0 if push was successful, 1 if nothing to push.

       Options:

       -f, --force
	      force push

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      a changeset intended to be included in the destination

       -B,--bookmark <BOOKMARK[+]>
	      bookmark to push

       -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
	      a specific branch you would like to push

       --new-branch
	      allow pushing a new branch

       --pushvars <VALUE[+]>
	      variables that can be sent to server (ADVANCED)

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
	      specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
	      specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
	      do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   recover
       roll back an interrupted transaction:

       hg recover

       Recover from an interrupted commit or pull.

       This command tries to fix the repository status	after  an  interrupted
       operation. It should only be necessary when Mercurial suggests it.

       Returns 0 if successful, 1 if nothing to recover or verify fails.

   remove
       remove the specified files on the next commit:

       hg remove [OPTION]... FILE...

       Schedule the indicated files for removal from the current branch.

       This  command schedules the files to be removed at the next commit.  To
       undo a remove before that, see hg revert. To undo added files,  see  hg
       forget.

       -A/--after  can	be  used  to  remove only files that have already been
       deleted, -f/--force can be used to force deletion, and -Af can be  used
       to  remove  files from the next revision without deleting them from the
       working directory.

       The following table details the behavior of remove for  different  file
       states  (columns)  and  option combinations (rows). The file states are
       Added [A], Clean [C], Modified [M] and Missing [!]  (as reported by  hg
       status).	 The  actions  are Warn, Remove (from branch) and Delete (from
       disk):

			    ┌──────────┬───┬────┬────┬───┐
			    │opt/state │ A │ C	│ M  │ ! │
			    ├──────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤
			    │none      │ W │ RD │ W  │ R │
			    ├──────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤
			    │-f	       │ R │ RD │ RD │ R │
			    ├──────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤
			    │-A	       │ W │ W	│ W  │ R │
			    ├──────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤
			    │-Af       │ R │ R	│ R  │ R │
			    └──────────┴───┴────┴────┴───┘

       Note   hg remove never deletes files in Added [A] state from the	 work‐
	      ing directory, not even if --force is specified.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if any warnings encountered.

       Options:

       -A, --after
	      record delete for missing files

       -f, --force
	      forget added files, delete modified files

       -S, --subrepos
	      recurse into subrepositories

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

	  aliases: rm

   rename
       rename files; equivalent of copy + remove:

       hg rename [OPTION]... SOURCE... DEST

       Mark dest as copies of sources; mark sources for deletion. If dest is a
       directory, copies are put in that directory. If dest is a  file,	 there
       can only be one source.

       By  default, this command copies the contents of files as they exist in
       the working directory. If invoked with  -A/--after,  the	 operation  is
       recorded, but no copying is performed.

       This  command  takes effect at the next commit. To undo a rename before
       that, see hg revert.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if errors are encountered.

       Options:

       -A, --after
	      record a rename that has already occurred

       -f, --force
	      forcibly copy over an existing managed file

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       -n, --dry-run
	      do not perform actions, just print output

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

	  aliases: move mv

   resolve
       redo merges or set/view the merge status of files:

       hg resolve [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Merges with unresolved conflicts are often the result  of  non-interac‐
       tive  merging using the internal:merge configuration setting, or a com‐
       mand-line merge tool like diff3. The resolve command is used to	manage
       the  files involved in a merge, after hg merge has been run, and before
       hg commit is run (i.e. the working directory must  have	two  parents).
       See hg help merge-tools for information on configuring merge tools.

       The resolve command can be used in the following ways:

       · hg  resolve  [--tool TOOL] FILE...: attempt to re-merge the specified
	 files, discarding any previous merge attempts. Re-merging is not per‐
	 formed	 for  files already marked as resolved. Use --all/-a to select
	 all unresolved files. --tool can be used to specify  the  merge  tool
	 used  for the given files. It overrides the HGMERGE environment vari‐
	 able and your configuration files.  Previous file contents are	 saved
	 with a .orig suffix.

       · hg resolve -m [FILE]: mark a file as having been resolved (e.g. after
	 having manually fixed-up the files). The default is to mark all unre‐
	 solved files.

       · hg resolve -u [FILE]...: mark a file as unresolved. The default is to
	 mark all resolved files.

       · hg resolve -l: list files which had or still have conflicts.  In  the
	 printed list, U = unresolved and R = resolved.	 You can use set:unre‐
	 solved() or set:resolved() to filter the list. See hg	help  filesets
	 for details.

       Note   Mercurial	 will  not  let you commit files with unresolved merge
	      conflicts. You must use hg resolve -m ... before you can	commit
	      after a conflicting merge.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if any files fail a resolve attempt.

       Options:

       -a, --all
	      select all unresolved files

       -l, --list
	      list state of files needing merge

       -m, --mark
	      mark files as resolved

       -u, --unmark
	      mark files as unresolved

       -n, --no-status
	      hide status prefix

       -t,--tool <VALUE>
	      specify merge tool

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   revert
       restore files to their checkout state:

       hg revert [OPTION]... [-r REV] [NAME]...

       Note   To  check	 out  earlier revisions, you should use hg update REV.
	      To cancel an uncommitted merge (and lose your changes),  use  hg
	      update --clean ..

       With  no	 revision specified, revert the specified files or directories
       to the contents they had in the parent of the working directory.	  This
       restores	 the  contents of files to an unmodified state and unschedules
       adds, removes, copies, and renames. If the working  directory  has  two
       parents, you must explicitly specify a revision.

       Using  the  -r/--rev  or	 -d/--date  options, revert the given files or
       directories to their states as of a specific revision.  Because	revert
       does  not  change  the working directory parents, this will cause these
       files to appear modified. This can be helpful to "back out" some or all
       of an earlier change. See hg backout for a related method.

       Modified files are saved with a .orig suffix before reverting.  To dis‐
       able these backups, use --no-backup. It is possible to store the backup
       files  in  a custom directory relative to the root of the repository by
       setting the ui.origbackuppath configuration option.

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       See hg help backout for a way to	 reverse  the  effect  of  an  earlier
       changeset.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -a, --all
	      revert all changes when no arguments given

       -d,--date <DATE>
	      tipmost revision matching date

       -r,--rev <REV>
	      revert to the specified revision

       -C, --no-backup
	      do not save backup copies of files

       -i, --interactive
	      interactively select the changes (EXPERIMENTAL)

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       -n, --dry-run
	      do not perform actions, just print output

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   rollback
       roll back the last transaction (DANGEROUS) (DEPRECATED):

       hg rollback

       Please use hg commit --amend instead of rollback to correct mistakes in
       the last commit.

       This command should be used with care. There is only one level of roll‐
       back,  and there is no way to undo a rollback. It will also restore the
       dirstate at the time of	the  last  transaction,	 losing	 any  dirstate
       changes since that time. This command does not alter the working direc‐
       tory.

       Transactions are used to encapsulate the effects of all	commands  that
       create  new  changesets or propagate existing changesets into a reposi‐
       tory.

       For example,  the  following  commands  are  transactional,  and	 their
       effects can be rolled back:

       · commit

       · import

       · pull

       · push (with this repository as the destination)

       · unbundle

       To avoid permanent data loss, rollback will refuse to rollback a commit
       transaction if it isn't checked out. Use --force to override this  pro‐
       tection.

       The  rollback  command can be entirely disabled by setting the ui.roll‐
       back configuration setting to false. If you're here because you want to
       use  rollback  and it's disabled, you can re-enable the command by set‐
       ting ui.rollback to true.

       This command is not intended  for  use  on  public  repositories.  Once
       changes are visible for pull by other users, rolling a transaction back
       locally is ineffective  (someone	 else  may  already  have  pulled  the
       changes).  Furthermore,	a race is possible with readers of the reposi‐
       tory; for example an in-progress pull from the repository may fail if a
       rollback is performed.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if no rollback data is available.

       Options:

       -n, --dry-run
	      do not perform actions, just print output

       -f, --force
	      ignore safety measures

   root
       print the root (top) of the current working directory:

       hg root

       Print the root directory of the current repository.

       Returns 0 on success.

   serve
       start stand-alone webserver:

       hg serve [OPTION]...

       Start a local HTTP repository browser and pull server. You can use this
       for ad-hoc sharing and browsing of repositories. It is  recommended  to
       use a real web server to serve a repository for longer periods of time.

       Please  note  that  the server does not implement access control.  This
       means that, by default, anybody can read from the server and nobody can
       write  to  it  by  default. Set the web.allow_push option to * to allow
       everybody to push to the server. You should use a real  web  server  if
       you need to authenticate users.

       By  default,  the  server logs accesses to stdout and errors to stderr.
       Use the -A/--accesslog and -E/--errorlog options to log to files.

       To have the server choose a free port number to listen  on,  specify  a
       port  number  of 0; in this case, the server will print the port number
       it uses.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -A,--accesslog <FILE>
	      name of access log file to write to

       -d, --daemon
	      run server in background

       --daemon-postexec <VALUE[+]>
	      used internally by daemon mode

       -E,--errorlog <FILE>
	      name of error log file to write to

       -p,--port <PORT>
	      port to listen on (default: 8000)

       -a,--address <ADDR>
	      address to listen on (default: all interfaces)

       --prefix <PREFIX>
	      prefix path to serve from (default: server root)

       -n,--name <NAME>
	      name to show in web pages (default: working directory)

       --web-conf <FILE>
	      name of the hgweb config file (see 'hg help hgweb')

       --webdir-conf <FILE>
	      name of the hgweb config file (DEPRECATED)

       --pid-file <FILE>
	      name of file to write process ID to

       --stdio
	      for remote clients (ADVANCED)

       --cmdserver <MODE>
	      for remote clients (ADVANCED)

       -t,--templates <TEMPLATE>
	      web templates to use

       --style <STYLE>
	      template style to use

       -6, --ipv6
	      use IPv6 in addition to IPv4

       --certificate <FILE>
	      SSL certificate file

       -S, --subrepos
	      recurse into subrepositories

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   status
       show changed files in the working directory:

       hg status [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Show status of files in the repository. If names are given, only	 files
       that  match are shown. Files that are clean or ignored or the source of
       a copy/move operation, are not listed unless -c/--clean,	 -i/--ignored,
       -C/--copies or -A/--all are given.  Unless options described with "show
       only ..." are given, the options -mardu are used.

       Option -q/--quiet hides untracked (unknown and  ignored)	 files	unless
       explicitly requested with -u/--unknown or -i/--ignored.

       Note   hg  status may  appear to disagree with diff if permissions have
	      changed or a merge has occurred. The standard diff  format  does
	      not report permission changes and diff only reports changes rel‐
	      ative to one merge parent.

       If one revision is given, it is used as	the  base  revision.   If  two
       revisions  are  given,  the  differences	 between  them	are shown. The
       --change option can also be used as a  shortcut	to  list  the  changed
       files of a revision from its first parent.

       The codes used to show the status of files are:

       M = modified
       A = added
       R = removed
       C = clean
       ! = missing (deleted by non-hg command, but still tracked)
       ? = not tracked
       I = ignored
	 = origin of the previous file (with --copies)

       The -t/--terse option abbreviates the output by showing only the direc‐
       tory name if all the files in it share  the  same  status.  The	option
       takes an argument indicating the statuses to abbreviate: 'm' for 'modi‐
       fied', 'a' for 'added', 'r' for 'removed', 'd' for 'deleted',  'u'  for
       'unknown', 'i' for 'ignored' and 'c' for clean.

       It  abbreviates	only  those statuses which are passed. Note that clean
       and ignored files are  not  displayed  with  '--terse  ic'  unless  the
       -c/--clean and -i/--ignored options are also used.

       The  -v/--verbose option shows information when the repository is in an
       unfinished merge, shelve, rebase state etc. You can have this  behavior
       turned on by default by enabling the commands.status.verbose option.

       You  can	 skip displaying some of these states by setting commands.sta‐
       tus.skipstates to  one  or  more	 of:  'bisect',	 'graft',  'histedit',
       'merge', 'rebase', or 'unshelve'.

       Examples:

       · show changes in the working directory relative to a changeset:

	 hg status --rev 9353

       · show  changes in the working directory relative to the current direc‐
	 tory (see hg help patterns for more information):

	 hg status re:

       · show all changes including copies in an existing changeset:

	 hg status --copies --change 9353

       · get a NUL separated list of added files, suitable for xargs:

	 hg status -an0

       · show more  information	 about	the  repository	 status,  abbreviating
	 added, removed, modified, deleted, and untracked paths:

	 hg status -v -t mardu

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -A, --all
	      show status of all files

       -m, --modified
	      show only modified files

       -a, --added
	      show only added files

       -r, --removed
	      show only removed files

       -d, --deleted
	      show only deleted (but tracked) files

       -c, --clean
	      show only files without changes

       -u, --unknown
	      show only unknown (not tracked) files

       -i, --ignored
	      show only ignored files

       -n, --no-status
	      hide status prefix

       -t,--terse <VALUE>
	      show the terse output (EXPERIMENTAL)

       -C, --copies
	      show source of copied files

       -0, --print0
	      end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs

       --rev <REV[+]>
	      show difference from revision

       --change <REV>
	      list the changed files of a revision

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       -S, --subrepos
	      recurse into subrepositories

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

	  aliases: st

   summary
       summarize working directory state:

       hg summary [--remote]

       This  generates a brief summary of the working directory state, includ‐
       ing parents, branch, commit status, phase and available updates.

       With the --remote option, this will check the default paths for	incom‐
       ing and outgoing changes. This can be time-consuming.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       --remote
	      check for push and pull

	      aliases: sum

   tag
       add one or more tags for the current or given revision:

       hg tag [-f] [-l] [-m TEXT] [-d DATE] [-u USER] [-r REV] NAME...

       Name a particular revision using <name>.

       Tags  are  used	to name particular revisions of the repository and are
       very useful to compare different revisions, to go back  to  significant
       earlier versions or to mark branch points as releases, etc. Changing an
       existing tag is normally disallowed; use -f/--force to override.

       If no revision is given, the parent of the working directory is used.

       To facilitate version control, distribution, and merging of tags,  they
       are  stored  as	a  file	 named ".hgtags" which is managed similarly to
       other project files and can be  hand-edited  if	necessary.  This  also
       means  that  tagging  creates a new commit. The file ".hg/localtags" is
       used for local tags (not shared among repositories).

       Tag commits are usually made at the head of a branch. If the parent  of
       the  working  directory	is  not	 a  branch  head,  hg  tag aborts; use
       -f/--force to force the tag commit to be based on a non-head changeset.

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       Since tag names have priority over branch names during revision lookup,
       using an existing branch name as a tag name is discouraged.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -f, --force
	      force tag

       -l, --local
	      make the tag local

       -r,--rev <REV>
	      revision to tag

       --remove
	      remove a tag

       -e, --edit
	      invoke editor on commit messages

       -m,--message <TEXT>
	      use text as commit message

       -d,--date <DATE>
	      record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
	      record the specified user as committer

   tags
       list repository tags:

       hg tags

       This lists both regular and local tags. When the -v/--verbose switch is
       used, a third column "local" is	printed	 for  local  tags.   When  the
       -q/--quiet switch is used, only the tag name is printed.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

   tip
       show the tip revision (DEPRECATED):

       hg tip [-p] [-g]

       The  tip	 revision  (usually just called the tip) is the changeset most
       recently added to the  repository  (and	therefore  the	most  recently
       changed head).

       If  you	have  just  made a commit, that commit will be the tip. If you
       have just pulled changes from  another  repository,  the	 tip  of  that
       repository becomes the current tip. The "tip" tag is special and cannot
       be renamed or assigned to a different changeset.

       This command is deprecated, please use hg heads instead.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -p, --patch
	      show patch

       -g, --git
	      use git extended diff format

       --style <STYLE>
	      display using template map file (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template

   unbundle
       apply one or more bundle files:

       hg unbundle [-u] FILE...

       Apply one or more bundle files generated by hg bundle.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if an update has unresolved files.

       Options:

       -u, --update
	      update to new branch head if changesets were unbundled

   update
       update working directory (or switch revisions):

       hg update [-C|-c|-m] [-d DATE] [[-r] REV]

       Update the repository's working directory to the	 specified  changeset.
       If  no  changeset  is specified, update to the tip of the current named
       branch and move the active bookmark (see hg help bookmarks).

       Update sets the working directory's parent revision  to	the  specified
       changeset (see hg help parents).

       If  the changeset is not a descendant or ancestor of the working direc‐
       tory's parent and there are uncommitted changes, the update is aborted.
       With the -c/--check option, the working directory is checked for uncom‐
       mitted changes; if none are found, the working directory is updated  to
       the specified changeset.

       The -C/--clean, -c/--check, and -m/--merge options control what happens
       if the working directory contains uncommitted changes.  At most of  one
       of them can be specified.

       1. If  no  option  is  specified,  and if the requested changeset is an
	  ancestor or descendant of the working directory's parent, the uncom‐
	  mitted  changes  are	merged	into  the  requested changeset and the
	  merged result is left uncommitted. If the requested changeset is not
	  an  ancestor	or  descendant (that is, it is on another branch), the
	  update is aborted and the uncommitted changes are preserved.

       2. With the -m/--merge option,  the  update  is	allowed	 even  if  the
	  requested  changeset is not an ancestor or descendant of the working
	  directory's parent.

       3. With the -c/--check option, the update is aborted and the  uncommit‐
	  ted changes are preserved.

       4. With	the  -C/--clean	 option, uncommitted changes are discarded and
	  the working directory is updated to the requested changeset.

       To cancel an uncommitted merge (and lose your changes), use  hg	update
       --clean ..

       Use  null  as  the  changeset  to remove the working directory (like hg
       clone -U).

       If you want to revert just one file to an older revision, use hg revert
       [-r REV] NAME.

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if there are unresolved files.

       Options:

       -C, --clean
	      discard uncommitted changes (no backup)

       -c, --check
	      require clean working directory

       -m, --merge
	      merge uncommitted changes

       -d,--date <DATE>
	      tipmost revision matching date

       -r,--rev <REV>
	      revision

       -t,--tool <VALUE>
	      specify merge tool

	      aliases: up checkout co

   verify
       verify the integrity of the repository:

       hg verify

       Verify the integrity of the current repository.

       This  will  perform  an	extensive check of the repository's integrity,
       validating the hashes and checksums of each  entry  in  the  changelog,
       manifest,  and  tracked	files,	as  well  as  the  integrity  of their
       crosslinks and indices.

       Please see https://mercurial-scm.org/wiki/RepositoryCorruption for more
       information about recovery from corruption of the repository.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if errors are encountered.

   version
       output version and copyright information:

       hg version

       output version and copyright information

       Options:

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

BUNDLE FILE FORMATS
       Mercurial  supports  generating	standalone  "bundle"  files  that hold
       repository data. These "bundles" are typically saved locally  and  used
       later  or exchanged between different repositories, possibly on differ‐
       ent machines. Example commands  using  bundles  are  hg	bundle and  hg
       unbundle.

       Generation  of  bundle  files is controlled by a "bundle specification"
       ("bundlespec") string. This string tells the bundle generation  process
       how to create the bundle.

       A "bundlespec" string is composed of the following elements:

       type   A string denoting the bundle format to use.

       compression
	      Denotes the compression engine to use compressing the raw bundle
	      data.

       parameters
	      Arbitrary key-value parameters to further control bundle genera‐
	      tion.

       A "bundlespec" string has the following formats:

       <type> The literal bundle format string is used.

       <compression>-<type>
	      The compression engine and format are delimited by a hyphen (-).

       Optional	 parameters  follow  the  <type>.  Parameters  are URI escaped
       key=value pairs. Each pair is delimited by a semicolon (;).  The	 first
       parameter begins after a ; immediately following the <type> value.

   Available Types
       The following bundle <type> strings are available:

       v1     Produces a legacy "changegroup" version 1 bundle.

	      This  format  is	compatible  with  nearly all Mercurial clients
	      because it is the oldest.	 However,  it  has  some  limitations,
	      which is why it is no longer the default for new repositories.

	      v1  bundles can be used with modern repositories using the "gen‐
	      eraldelta" storage format. However, it may take longer  to  pro‐
	      duce  the	 bundle	 and the resulting bundle may be significantly
	      larger than a v2 bundle.

	      v1 bundles can only use the gzip, bzip2,	and  none  compression
	      formats.

       v2     Produces a version 2 bundle.

	      Version  2 bundles are an extensible format that can store addi‐
	      tional repository data (such as bookmarks	 and  phases  informa‐
	      tion)  and  they	can  store data more efficiently, resulting in
	      smaller bundles.

	      Version 2 bundles can also use modern compression engines,  such
	      as zstd, making them faster to compress and often smaller.

   Available Compression Engines
       The following bundle <compression> engines can be used:

       bzip2

	      An algorithm that produces smaller bundles than gzip.

	      All Mercurial clients should support this format.

	      This  engine  will  likely produce smaller bundles than gzip but
	      will be significantly slower, both during compression and decom‐
	      pression.

	      If  available,  the zstd engine can yield similar or better com‐
	      pression at much higher speeds.

       gzip

	      zlib compression using the DEFLATE algorithm.

	      All Mercurial clients should support this format.	 The  compres‐
	      sion  algorithm strikes a reasonable balance between compression
	      ratio and size.

       none

	      No compression is performed.

	      Use this compression engine to explicitly disable compression.

   Examples
       v2

	      Produce a v2 bundle using default	 options,  including  compres‐
	      sion.

       none-v1

	      Produce a v1 bundle with no compression.

       zstd-v2

	      Produce  a  v2  bundle  with zstandard compression using default
	      settings.

       zstd-v1

	      This errors because zstd is not supported for v1 types.

COLORIZING OUTPUTS
       Mercurial colorizes output from several commands.

       For example, the diff command shows additions in green and deletions in
       red,  while  the	 status	 command shows modified files in magenta. Many
       other commands have analogous colors. It is possible to customize these
       colors.

       To enable color (default) whenever possible use:

       [ui]
       color = yes

       To disable color use:

       [ui]
       color = no

       See hg help config.ui.color for details.

       The  default  pager  on Windows does not support color, so enabling the
       pager will effectively disable color.  See hg  help  config.ui.paginate
       to disable the pager.  Alternately, MSYS and Cygwin shells provide less
       as a pager, which can be configured to support ANSI color  mode.	  Win‐
       dows 10 natively supports ANSI color mode.

   Mode
       Mercurial can use various systems to display color. The supported modes
       are ansi, win32, and terminfo.  See hg  help  config.color for  details
       about how to control the mode.

   Effects
       Other  effects in addition to color, like bold and underlined text, are
       also available. By default, the terminfo database is used to  find  the
       terminal	 codes	used  to  change color and effect.  If terminfo is not
       available, then effects are rendered with the ECMA-48 SGR control func‐
       tion (aka ANSI escape codes).

       The  available  effects	in  terminfo  mode are 'blink', 'bold', 'dim',
       'inverse',  'invisible',	 'italic',  'standout',	 and  'underline';  in
       ECMA-48	mode, the options are 'bold', 'inverse', 'italic', and 'under‐
       line'.  How each is rendered depends on the  terminal  emulator.	  Some
       may  not	 be  available for a given terminal type, and will be silently
       ignored.

       If the terminfo entry for your terminal is missing codes for an	effect
       or  has	the  wrong  codes, you can add or override those codes in your
       configuration:

       [color]
       terminfo.dim = \E[2m

       where 'E' is substituted with an escape character.

   Labels
       Text receives color effects depending on the labels that it  has.  Many
       default Mercurial commands emit labelled text. You can also define your
       own labels in templates using the label function, see hg help templates
       .  A single portion of text may have more than one label. In that case,
       effects given to the last label will override any other	effects.  This
       includes the special "none" effect, which nullifies other effects.

       Labels  are  normally invisible. In order to see these labels and their
       position in the text, use the global  --color=debug  option.  The  same
       anchor text may be associated to multiple labels, e.g.

	  [log.changeset changeset.secret|changeset:   22611:6f0a53c8f587]

       The  following are the default effects for some default labels. Default
       effects may be overridden from your configuration file:

       [color]
       status.modified = blue bold underline red_background
       status.added = green bold
       status.removed = red bold blue_background
       status.deleted = cyan bold underline
       status.unknown = magenta bold underline
       status.ignored = black bold

       # 'none' turns off all effects
       status.clean = none
       status.copied = none

       qseries.applied = blue bold underline
       qseries.unapplied = black bold
       qseries.missing = red bold

       diff.diffline = bold
       diff.extended = cyan bold
       diff.file_a = red bold
       diff.file_b = green bold
       diff.hunk = magenta
       diff.deleted = red
       diff.inserted = green
       diff.changed = white
       diff.tab =
       diff.trailingwhitespace = bold red_background

       # Blank so it inherits the style of the surrounding label
       changeset.public =
       changeset.draft =
       changeset.secret =

       resolve.unresolved = red bold
       resolve.resolved = green bold

       bookmarks.active = green

       branches.active = none
       branches.closed = black bold
       branches.current = green
       branches.inactive = none

       tags.normal = green
       tags.local = black bold

       rebase.rebased = blue
       rebase.remaining = red bold

       shelve.age = cyan
       shelve.newest = green bold
       shelve.name = blue bold

       histedit.remaining = red bold

   Custom colors
       Because there are only eight standard colors, Mercurial allows  you  to
       define  color  names for other color slots which might be available for
       your terminal type, assuming terminfo mode.  For instance:

       color.brightblue = 12
       color.pink = 207
       color.orange = 202

       to set 'brightblue' to color slot 12 (useful  for  16  color  terminals
       that  have  brighter colors defined in the upper eight) and, 'pink' and
       'orange' to colors in 256-color	xterm's	 default  color	 cube.	 These
       defined	colors	may  then  be  used  as	 any of the pre-defined eight,
       including appending '_background' to set the background to that color.

DATE FORMATS
       Some commands allow the user to specify a date, e.g.:

       · backout, commit, import, tag: Specify the commit date.

       · log, revert, update: Select revision(s) by date.

       Many date formats are valid. Here are some examples:

       · Wed Dec 6 13:18:29 2006 (local timezone assumed)

       · Dec 6 13:18 -0600 (year assumed, time offset provided)

       · Dec 6 13:18 UTC (UTC and GMT are aliases for +0000)

       · Dec 6 (midnight)

       · 13:18 (today assumed)

       · 3:39 (3:39AM assumed)

       · 3:39pm (15:39)

       · 2006-12-06 13:18:29 (ISO 8601 format)

       · 2006-12-6 13:18

       · 2006-12-6

       · 12-6

       · 12/6

       · 12/6/6 (Dec 6 2006)

       · today (midnight)

       · yesterday (midnight)

       · now - right now

       Lastly, there is Mercurial's internal format:

       · 1165411109 0 (Wed Dec 6 13:18:29 2006 UTC)

       This is the internal representation format for dates. The first	number
       is  the	number	of seconds since the epoch (1970-01-01 00:00 UTC). The
       second is the offset of the local timezone,  in	seconds	 west  of  UTC
       (negative if the timezone is east of UTC).

       The log command also accepts date ranges:

       · <DATE - at or before a given date/time

       · >DATE - on or after a given date/time

       · DATE to DATE - a date range, inclusive

       · -DAYS - within a given number of days of today

DIFF FORMATS
       Mercurial's  default format for showing changes between two versions of
       a file is compatible with the unified format of GNU diff, which can  be
       used by GNU patch and many other standard tools.

       While this standard format is often enough, it does not encode the fol‐
       lowing information:

       · executable status and other permission bits

       · copy or rename information

       · changes in binary files

       · creation or deletion of empty files

       Mercurial also supports the extended diff format from the git VCS which
       addresses  these	 limitations.  The  git diff format is not produced by
       default because a few widespread tools still  do	 not  understand  this
       format.

       This means that when generating diffs from a Mercurial repository (e.g.
       with hg export), you should be careful about things  like  file	copies
       and  renames  or	 other things mentioned above, because when applying a
       standard diff to a different  repository,  this	extra  information  is
       lost.  Mercurial's  internal  operations	 (like	push and pull) are not
       affected by this, because they use an internal binary format for commu‐
       nicating changes.

       To  make	 Mercurial produce the git extended diff format, use the --git
       option available for many commands, or set 'git = True' in  the	[diff]
       section	of your configuration file. You do not need to set this option
       when importing diffs in this format or using them in the mq extension.

ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
       HG     Path to the 'hg' executable, automatically passed	 when  running
	      hooks,  extensions or external tools. If unset or empty, this is
	      the hg executable's name if it's frozen, or an executable	 named
	      'hg'  (with %PATHEXT% [defaulting to COM/EXE/BAT/CMD] extensions
	      on Windows) is searched.

       HGEDITOR
	      This is the name of the editor to run when committing. See  EDI‐
	      TOR.

	      (deprecated, see hg help config.ui.editor)

       HGENCODING
	      This overrides the default locale setting detected by Mercurial.
	      This setting  is	used  to  convert  data	 including  usernames,
	      changeset	 descriptions,	tag  names, and branches. This setting
	      can be overridden with the --encoding command-line option.

       HGENCODINGMODE
	      This sets Mercurial's behavior for handling  unknown  characters
	      while  transcoding  user	input.	The default is "strict", which
	      causes Mercurial to abort if it can't  map  a  character.	 Other
	      settings	include	 "replace", which replaces unknown characters,
	      and "ignore", which drops them. This setting can	be  overridden
	      with the --encodingmode command-line option.

       HGENCODINGAMBIGUOUS
	      This  sets  Mercurial's  behavior	 for  handling characters with
	      "ambiguous" widths like  accented	 Latin	characters  with  East
	      Asian  fonts. By default, Mercurial assumes ambiguous characters
	      are narrow, set this variable to "wide" if such characters cause
	      formatting problems.

       HGMERGE
	      An  executable to use for resolving merge conflicts. The program
	      will be executed with three arguments: local file, remote	 file,
	      ancestor file.

	      (deprecated, see hg help config.ui.merge)

       HGRCPATH
	      A	 list  of  files  or  directories  to search for configuration
	      files. Item separator is ":" on Unix, ";" on Windows.  If	 HGRC‐
	      PATH is not set, platform default search path is used. If empty,
	      only the .hg/hgrc from the current repository is read.

	      For each element in HGRCPATH:

	      · if it's a directory, all files ending with .rc are added

	      · otherwise, the file itself will be added

       HGPLAIN
	      When set, this disables any configuration	 settings  that	 might
	      change  Mercurial's  default  output.  This  includes  encoding,
	      defaults, verbose mode, debug mode, quiet mode, tracebacks,  and
	      localization.  This  can be useful when scripting against Mercu‐
	      rial in the face of existing user configuration.

	      Equivalent options set via command  line	flags  or  environment
	      variables are not overridden.

       HGPLAINEXCEPT
	      This  is	a  comma-separated  list  of features to preserve when
	      HGPLAIN is enabled. Currently  the  following  values  are  sup‐
	      ported:

	      alias

		     Don't remove aliases.

	      i18n

		     Preserve internationalization.

	      revsetalias

		     Don't remove revset aliases.

	      templatealias

		     Don't remove template aliases.

	      progress

		     Don't hide progress output.

	      Setting  HGPLAINEXCEPT  to  anything (even an empty string) will
	      enable plain mode.

       HGUSER This is the string used as the author of a commit. If  not  set,
	      available values will be considered in this order:

	      · HGUSER (deprecated)

	      · configuration files from the HGRCPATH

	      · EMAIL

	      · interactive prompt

	      · LOGNAME (with @hostname appended)

	      (deprecated, see hg help config.ui.username)

       EMAIL  May be used as the author of a commit; see HGUSER.

       LOGNAME
	      May be used as the author of a commit; see HGUSER.

       VISUAL This  is the name of the editor to use when committing. See EDI‐
	      TOR.

       EDITOR Sometimes Mercurial needs to open a text file in an editor for a
	      user  to	modify,	 for example when writing commit messages. The
	      editor it uses is determined by looking at the environment vari‐
	      ables  HGEDITOR,	VISUAL	and  EDITOR,  in that order. The first
	      non-empty one is chosen. If all of them are  empty,  the	editor
	      defaults to 'sensible-editor'.

       PYTHONPATH
	      This  is used by Python to find imported modules and may need to
	      be set appropriately if this Mercurial  is  not  installed  sys‐
	      tem-wide.

USING ADDITIONAL FEATURES
       Mercurial has the ability to add new features through the use of exten‐
       sions. Extensions may add new commands, add options  to	existing  com‐
       mands, change the default behavior of commands, or implement hooks.

       To  enable the "foo" extension, either shipped with Mercurial or in the
       Python search path, create an entry for it in your configuration	 file,
       like this:

       [extensions]
       foo =

       You may also specify the full path to an extension:

       [extensions]
       myfeature = ~/.hgext/myfeature.py

       See hg help config for more information on configuration files.

       Extensions are not loaded by default for a variety of reasons: they can
       increase startup overhead; they may be meant for advanced  usage	 only;
       they  may  provide potentially dangerous abilities (such as letting you
       destroy or modify history); they might not be ready for prime time;  or
       they  may  alter some usual behaviors of stock Mercurial. It is thus up
       to the user to activate extensions as needed.

       To explicitly disable an extension enabled in a configuration  file  of
       broader scope, prepend its path with !:

       [extensions]
       # disabling extension bar residing in /path/to/extension/bar.py
       bar = !/path/to/extension/bar.py
       # ditto, but no path was supplied for extension baz
       baz = !

       disabled extensions:

	  acl	 hooks for controlling repository access

	  blackbox
		 log repository events to a blackbox for debugging

	  bugzilla
		 hooks for integrating with the Bugzilla bug tracker

	  censor erase file content at a given revision

	  churn	 command to display statistics about repository history

	  clonebundles
		 advertise pre-generated bundles to seed clones

	  convert
		 import revisions from foreign VCS repositories into Mercurial

	  eol	 automatically manage newlines in repository files

	  extdiff
		 command to allow external programs to compare revisions

	  factotum
		 http authentication with factotum

	  gpg	 commands to sign and verify changesets

	  hgk	 browse the repository in a graphical way

	  highlight
		 syntax highlighting for hgweb (requires Pygments)

	  histedit
		 interactive history editing

	  keyword
		 expand keywords in tracked files

	  largefiles
		 track large binary files

	  mq	 manage a stack of patches

	  notify hooks for sending email push notifications

	  patchbomb
		 command to send changesets as (a series of) patch emails

	  purge	 command to delete untracked files from the working directory

	  rebase command to move sets of revisions to a different ancestor

	  relink recreates hardlinks between repository clones

	  schemes
		 extend schemes with shortcuts to repository swarms

	  share	 share a common history between several working directories

	  shelve save and restore changes to the working directory

	  strip	 strip changesets and their descendants from history

	  transplant
		 command to transplant changesets from another branch

	  win32mbcs
		 allow the use of MBCS paths with problematic encodings

	  zeroconf
		 discover and advertise repositories on the local network

SPECIFYING FILE SETS
       Mercurial supports a functional language for selecting a set of files.

       Like  other  file patterns, this pattern type is indicated by a prefix,
       'set:'. The language supports a number of predicates which  are	joined
       by infix operators. Parenthesis can be used for grouping.

       Identifiers such as filenames or patterns must be quoted with single or
       double	quotes	  if	they	contain	   characters	 outside    of
       [.*{}[]?/\_a-zA-Z0-9\x80-\xff]  or  if they match one of the predefined
       predicates. This generally applies to file patterns  other  than	 globs
       and arguments for predicates.

       Special	characters can be used in quoted identifiers by escaping them,
       e.g., \n is interpreted as a newline. To prevent them from being inter‐
       preted, strings can be prefixed with r, e.g. r'...'.

       See also hg help patterns.

   Operators
       There is a single prefix operator:

       not x

	      Files not in x. Short form is ! x.

       These are the supported infix operators:

       x and y

	      The intersection of files in x and y. Short form is x & y.

       x or y

	      The  union  of files in x and y. There are two alternative short
	      forms: x | y and x + y.

       x - y

	      Files in x but not in y.

   Predicates
       The following predicates are supported:

       added()

	      File that is added according to hg status.

       binary()

	      File that appears to be binary (contains NUL bytes).

       clean()

	      File that is clean according to hg status.

       copied()

	      File that is recorded as being copied.

       deleted()

	      Alias for missing().

       encoding(name)

	      File can be successfully decoded with the given character encod‐
	      ing. May not be useful for encodings other than ASCII and UTF-8.

       eol(style)

	      File  contains  newlines	of  the	 given style (dos, unix, mac).
	      Binary files are excluded, files with mixed line	endings	 match
	      multiple styles.

       exec()

	      File that is marked as executable.

       grep(regex)

	      File contains the given regular expression.

       hgignore()

	      File that matches the active .hgignore pattern.

       ignored()

	      File  that  is  ignored according to hg status. These files will
	      only be considered if this predicate is used.

       missing()

	      File that is missing according to hg status.

       modified()

	      File that is modified according to hg status.

       portable()

	      File that has a portable name. (This doesn't  include  filenames
	      with case collisions.)

       removed()

	      File that is removed according to hg status.

       resolved()

	      File that is marked resolved according to hg resolve -l.

       revs(revs, pattern)

	      Evaluate	set  in	 the  specified revisions. If the revset match
	      multiple revs, this will return file matching pattern in any  of
	      the revision.

       size(expression)

	      File size matches the given expression. Examples:

	      · size('1k') - files from 1024 to 2047 bytes

	      · size('< 20k') - files less than 20480 bytes

	      · size('>= .5MB') - files at least 524288 bytes

	      · size('4k - 1MB') - files from 4096 bytes to 1048576 bytes

       status(base, rev, pattern)

	      Evaluate	predicate  using  status  change between base and rev.
	      Examples:

	      · status(3, 7, added()) - matches files added from "3" to "7"

       subrepo([pattern])

	      Subrepositories whose paths match the given pattern.

       symlink()

	      File that is marked as a symlink.

       unknown()

	      File that is unknown according to hg status.  These  files  will
	      only be considered if this predicate is used.

       unresolved()

	      File that is marked unresolved according to hg resolve -l.

   Examples
       Some sample queries:

       · Show  status  of files that appear to be binary in the working direc‐
	 tory:

	 hg status -A "set:binary()"

       · Forget files that are in .hgignore but are already tracked:

	 hg forget "set:hgignore() and not ignored()"

       · Find text files that contain a string:

	 hg files "set:grep(magic) and not binary()"

       · Find C files in a non-standard encoding:

	 hg files "set:**.c and not encoding('UTF-8')"

       · Revert copies of large binary files:

	 hg revert "set:copied() and binary() and size('>1M')"

       · Revert files that were added to the working directory:

	 hg revert "set:revs('wdir()', added())"

       · Remove files listed in foo.lst that contain the letter a or b:

	 hg remove "set: 'listfile:foo.lst' and (**a* or **b*)"

GLOSSARY
       Ancestor
	      Any changeset that can be reached by an unbroken chain of parent
	      changesets from a given changeset. More precisely, the ancestors
	      of a changeset can be defined by two properties: a parent	 of  a
	      changeset	 is  an	 ancestor,  and	 a parent of an ancestor is an
	      ancestor. See also: 'Descendant'.

       Bookmark
	      Bookmarks are pointers to certain commits that move when commit‐
	      ting.  They  are	similar	 to tags in that it is possible to use
	      bookmark names in all places where Mercurial expects a changeset
	      ID, e.g., with hg update. Unlike tags, bookmarks move along when
	      you make a commit.

	      Bookmarks can be renamed,	 copied	 and  deleted.	Bookmarks  are
	      local,  unless  they  are	 explicitly  pushed  or pulled between
	      repositories.  Pushing and pulling bookmarks allow you  to  col‐
	      laborate	with  others  on  a  branch  without  creating a named
	      branch.

       Branch (Noun) A child changeset that has been  created  from  a	parent
	      that is not a head. These are known as topological branches, see
	      'Branch, topological'. If a  topological	branch	is  named,  it
	      becomes a named branch. If a topological branch is not named, it
	      becomes  an  anonymous  branch.  See  'Branch,  anonymous'   and
	      'Branch, named'.

	      Branches	may  be created when changes are pulled from or pushed
	      to a remote repository, since new heads may be created by	 these
	      operations.  Note	 that  the term branch can also be used infor‐
	      mally to describe a development process in which certain	devel‐
	      opment is done independently of other development. This is some‐
	      times done explicitly with a named branch, but it	 can  also  be
	      done locally, using bookmarks or clones and anonymous branches.

	      Example: "The experimental branch."

	      (Verb) The action of creating a child changeset which results in
	      its parent having more than one child.

	      Example: "I'm going to branch at X."

       Branch, anonymous
	      Every time a new child changeset is created from a  parent  that
	      is  not  a head and the name of the branch is not changed, a new
	      anonymous branch is created.

       Branch, closed
	      A named branch whose branch heads have all been closed.

       Branch, default
	      The branch assigned to a changeset when no name  has  previously
	      been assigned.

       Branch head
	      See 'Head, branch'.

       Branch, inactive
	      If  a named branch has no topological heads, it is considered to
	      be inactive. As an example, a feature  branch  becomes  inactive
	      when  it is merged into the default branch. The hg branches com‐
	      mand shows inactive branches by default, though they can be hid‐
	      den with hg branches --active.

	      NOTE:  this  concept  is	deprecated because it is too implicit.
	      Branches	should	now  be	 explicitly  closed  using  hg	commit
	      --close-branch when they are no longer needed.

       Branch, named
	      A	 collection  of changesets which have the same branch name. By
	      default, children of a changeset in a named branch belong to the
	      same  named branch. A child can be explicitly assigned to a dif‐
	      ferent branch. See hg help branch, hg help branches and hg  com‐
	      mit --close-branch for more information on managing branches.

	      Named  branches can be thought of as a kind of namespace, divid‐
	      ing the collection of changesets that  comprise  the  repository
	      into  a  collection  of  disjoint subsets. A named branch is not
	      necessarily a topological branch. If a new named branch is  cre‐
	      ated  from  the  head  of	 another  named branch, or the default
	      branch, but no further changesets are  added  to	that  previous
	      branch, then that previous branch will be a branch in name only.

       Branch tip
	      See 'Tip, branch'.

       Branch, topological
	      Every  time  a new child changeset is created from a parent that
	      is not a head, a new topological branch is created. If  a	 topo‐
	      logical  branch  is named, it becomes a named branch. If a topo‐
	      logical branch is not named, it becomes an anonymous  branch  of
	      the current, possibly default, branch.

       Changelog
	      A record of the changesets in the order in which they were added
	      to the repository. This includes details such as	changeset  id,
	      author, commit message, date, and list of changed files.

       Changeset
	      A	 snapshot  of  the  state  of  the repository used to record a
	      change.

       Changeset, child
	      The converse of parent changeset: if P is a parent of C, then  C
	      is  a  child  of	P. There is no limit to the number of children
	      that a changeset may have.

       Changeset id
	      A SHA-1 hash that uniquely identifies a  changeset.  It  may  be
	      represented as either a "long" 40 hexadecimal digit string, or a
	      "short" 12 hexadecimal digit string.

       Changeset, merge
	      A changeset with two parents. This occurs when a merge  is  com‐
	      mitted.

       Changeset, parent
	      A	 revision upon which a child changeset is based. Specifically,
	      a parent changeset of a changeset C is a	changeset  whose  node
	      immediately  precedes  C in the DAG. Changesets have at most two
	      parents.

       Checkout
	      (Noun) The working directory being updated to a  specific	 revi‐
	      sion.  This  use	should	probably be avoided where possible, as
	      changeset is much more appropriate than checkout	in  this  con‐
	      text.

	      Example: "I'm using checkout X."

	      (Verb)  Updating	the working directory to a specific changeset.
	      See hg help update.

	      Example: "I'm going to check out changeset X."

       Child changeset
	      See 'Changeset, child'.

       Close changeset
	      See 'Head, closed branch'.

       Closed branch
	      See 'Branch, closed'.

       Clone  (Noun) An entire or partial copy of a  repository.  The  partial
	      clone must be in the form of a revision and its ancestors.

	      Example: "Is your clone up to date?"

	      (Verb) The process of creating a clone, using hg clone.

	      Example: "I'm going to clone the repository."

       Closed branch head
	      See 'Head, closed branch'.

       Commit (Noun) A synonym for changeset.

	      Example: "Is the bug fixed in your recent commit?"

	      (Verb)  The act of recording changes to a repository. When files
	      are committed in a working directory, Mercurial finds  the  dif‐
	      ferences between the committed files and their parent changeset,
	      creating a new changeset in the repository.

	      Example: "You should commit those changes now."

       Cset   A common abbreviation of the term changeset.

       DAG    The repository of changesets of a	 distributed  version  control
	      system  (DVCS)  can  be  described  as  a directed acyclic graph
	      (DAG), consisting of nodes and edges, where nodes correspond  to
	      changesets  and  edges  imply  a	parent -> child relation. This
	      graph can be visualized  by  graphical  tools  such  as  hg  log
	      --graph. In Mercurial, the DAG is limited by the requirement for
	      children to have at most two parents.

       Deprecated
	      Feature  removed	from  documentation,  but  not	scheduled  for
	      removal.

       Default branch
	      See 'Branch, default'.

       Descendant
	      Any changeset that can be reached by a chain of child changesets
	      from a given changeset. More precisely,  the  descendants	 of  a
	      changeset	 can  be  defined  by  two  properties: the child of a
	      changeset is a descendant, and the child of a  descendant	 is  a
	      descendant. See also: 'Ancestor'.

       Diff   (Noun)  The  difference  between	the contents and attributes of
	      files in two changesets or a changeset and the  current  working
	      directory.  The  difference is usually represented in a standard
	      form called a "diff" or "patch". The "git diff" format  is  used
	      when  the	 changes  include  copies, renames, or changes to file
	      attributes, none of which can be represented/handled by  classic
	      "diff" and "patch".

	      Example: "Did you see my correction in the diff?"

	      (Verb)  Diffing  two changesets is the action of creating a diff
	      or patch.

	      Example: "If you diff with changeset X,  you  will  see  what  I
	      mean."

       Directory, working
	      The  working directory represents the state of the files tracked
	      by Mercurial, that will be recorded  in  the  next  commit.  The
	      working  directory  initially  corresponds to the snapshot at an
	      existing changeset, known as the parent of  the  working	direc‐
	      tory. See 'Parent, working directory'. The state may be modified
	      by changes to the files introduced manually or by a  merge.  The
	      repository metadata exists in the .hg directory inside the work‐
	      ing directory.

       Draft  Changesets in the draft phase have not been shared with publish‐
	      ing repositories and may thus be safely changed by history-modi‐
	      fying extensions. See hg help phases.

       Experimental
	      Feature that may change or be removed at a later date.

       Graph  See DAG and hg log --graph.

       Head   The term 'head' may be used to refer to both a branch head or  a
	      repository  head,	 depending  on the context. See 'Head, branch'
	      and 'Head, repository' for specific definitions.

	      Heads are where development generally takes place	 and  are  the
	      usual targets for update and merge operations.

       Head, branch
	      A changeset with no descendants on the same named branch.

       Head, closed branch
	      A	 changeset  that  marks	 a  head as no longer interesting. The
	      closed head is no longer listed by hg heads. A branch is consid‐
	      ered  closed  when  all its heads are closed and consequently is
	      not listed by hg branches.

	      Closed heads can be re-opened by committing new changeset as the
	      child of the changeset that marks a head as closed.

       Head, repository
	      A topological head which has not been closed.

       Head, topological
	      A changeset with no children in the repository.

       History, immutable
	      Once  committed, changesets cannot be altered.  Extensions which
	      appear to change history actually	 create	 new  changesets  that
	      replace  existing	 ones,	and  then  destroy the old changesets.
	      Doing so in public repositories can  result  in  old  changesets
	      being reintroduced to the repository.

       History, rewriting
	      The  changesets  in  a repository are immutable. However, exten‐
	      sions to Mercurial can be used to alter the repository,  usually
	      in such a way as to preserve changeset contents.

       Immutable history
	      See 'History, immutable'.

       Merge changeset
	      See 'Changeset, merge'.

       Manifest
	      Each  changeset  has a manifest, which is the list of files that
	      are tracked by the changeset.

       Merge  Used to bring together divergent	branches  of  work.  When  you
	      update  to  a  changeset	and  then merge another changeset, you
	      bring the history of the	latter	changeset  into	 your  working
	      directory.  Once conflicts are resolved (and marked), this merge
	      may be committed as a merge  changeset,  bringing	 two  branches
	      together in the DAG.

       Named branch
	      See 'Branch, named'.

       Null changeset
	      The empty changeset. It is the parent state of newly-initialized
	      repositories and repositories with no checked out	 revision.  It
	      is thus the parent of root changesets and the effective ancestor
	      when merging unrelated changesets. Can be specified by the alias
	      'null' or by the changeset ID '000000000000'.

       Parent See 'Changeset, parent'.

       Parent changeset
	      See 'Changeset, parent'.

       Parent, working directory
	      The  working  directory parent reflects a virtual revision which
	      is the child of the changeset (or two changesets with an	uncom‐
	      mitted  merge)  shown  by	 hg  parents.  This is changed with hg
	      update. Other commands to see the working directory  parent  are
	      hg summary and hg id. Can be specified by the alias ".".

       Patch  (Noun) The product of a diff operation.

	      Example: "I've sent you my patch."

	      (Verb)  The  process  of	using  a  patch	 file to transform one
	      changeset into another.

	      Example: "You will need to patch that revision."

       Phase  A per-changeset state tracking how the  changeset	 has  been  or
	      should be shared. See hg help phases.

       Public Changesets  in the public phase have been shared with publishing
	      repositories and are therefore considered immutable. See hg help
	      phases.

       Pull   An  operation  in	 which changesets in a remote repository which
	      are not in the local  repository	are  brought  into  the	 local
	      repository.  Note	 that this operation without special arguments
	      only updates the repository, it does not update the files in the
	      working directory. See hg help pull.

       Push   An operation in which changesets in a local repository which are
	      not in a remote repository are sent to  the  remote  repository.
	      Note  that  this	operation only adds changesets which have been
	      committed locally to the remote repository. Uncommitted  changes
	      are not sent. See hg help push.

       Repository
	      The  metadata  describing all recorded states of a collection of
	      files. Each recorded state is  represented  by  a	 changeset.  A
	      repository  is  usually (but not always) found in the .hg subdi‐
	      rectory of a working directory. Any recorded state can be recre‐
	      ated by "updating" a working directory to a specific changeset.

       Repository head
	      See 'Head, repository'.

       Revision
	      A	 state	of the repository at some point in time. Earlier revi‐
	      sions can be updated to by using hg update.  See also  'Revision
	      number'; See also 'Changeset'.

       Revision number
	      This  integer  uniquely  identifies  a  changeset	 in a specific
	      repository. It represents the order  in  which  changesets  were
	      added  to	 a  repository,	 starting with revision number 0. Note
	      that the revision number may be different in  each  clone	 of  a
	      repository.  To  identify	 changesets uniquely between different
	      clones, see 'Changeset id'.

       Revlog History storage mechanism used by Mercurial. It  is  a  form  of
	      delta  encoding,	with occasional full revision of data followed
	      by delta of each successive revision. It includes	 data  and  an
	      index pointing to the data.

       Rewriting history
	      See 'History, rewriting'.

       Root   A changeset that has only the null changeset as its parent. Most
	      repositories have only a single root changeset.

       Secret Changesets in the secret phase may not be shared via push, pull,
	      or clone. See hg help phases.

       Tag    An  alternative  name  given to a changeset. Tags can be used in
	      all places where Mercurial expects a changeset ID, e.g., with hg
	      update.  The creation of a tag is stored in the history and will
	      thus automatically be shared with other using push and pull.

       Tip    The changeset with  the  highest	revision  number.  It  is  the
	      changeset most recently added in a repository.

       Tip, branch
	      The  head	 of  a	given branch with the highest revision number.
	      When a branch name is used as a revision identifier,  it	refers
	      to  the  branch  tip. See also 'Branch, head'. Note that because
	      revision	numbers	 may  be  different  in	 different  repository
	      clones,  the  branch  tip	 may  be different in different cloned
	      repositories.

       Update (Noun) Another synonym of changeset.

	      Example: "I've pushed an update."

	      (Verb) This term is usually used to describe updating the	 state
	      of the working directory to that of a specific changeset. See hg
	      help update.

	      Example: "You should update."

       Working directory
	      See 'Directory, working'.

       Working directory parent
	      See 'Parent, working directory'.

SYNTAX FOR MERCURIAL IGNORE FILES
   Synopsis
       The Mercurial system uses a file called .hgignore in the root directory
       of a repository to control its behavior when it searches for files that
       it is not currently tracking.

   Description
       The working directory of a  Mercurial  repository  will	often  contain
       files  that  should  not	 be tracked by Mercurial. These include backup
       files created by editors	 and  build  products  created	by  compilers.
       These  files  can be ignored by listing them in a .hgignore file in the
       root of the working directory. The .hgignore file must be created manu‐
       ally.  It  is typically put under version control, so that the settings
       will propagate to other repositories with push and pull.

       An untracked file is ignored if its path	 relative  to  the  repository
       root directory, or any prefix path of that path, is matched against any
       pattern in .hgignore.

       For example, say we have	 an  untracked	file,  file.c,	at  a/b/file.c
       inside  our  repository. Mercurial will ignore file.c if any pattern in
       .hgignore matches a/b/file.c, a/b or a.

       In addition, a Mercurial configuration file  can	 reference  a  set  of
       per-user	 or  global  ignore files. See the ignore configuration key on
       the [ui] section of hg help config for  details	of  how	 to  configure
       these files.

       To control Mercurial's handling of files that it manages, many commands
       support the -I and -X options; see hg help <command> and hg  help  pat‐
       terns for details.

       Files  that  are already tracked are not affected by .hgignore, even if
       they appear in .hgignore. An untracked file X can be  explicitly	 added
       with hg add X, even if X would be excluded by a pattern in .hgignore.

   Syntax
       An  ignore  file is a plain text file consisting of a list of patterns,
       with one pattern per line. Empty lines are skipped. The # character  is
       treated	as  a  comment character, and the \ character is treated as an
       escape character.

       Mercurial supports several pattern syntaxes. The default syntax used is
       Python/Perl-style regular expressions.

       To change the syntax used, use a line of the following form:

       syntax: NAME

       where NAME is one of the following:

       regexp

	      Regular expression, Python/Perl syntax.

       glob

	      Shell-style glob.

       The  chosen  syntax stays in effect when parsing all patterns that fol‐
       low, until another syntax is selected.

       Neither glob nor regexp patterns are rooted. A glob-syntax  pattern  of
       the  form  *.c  will  match a file ending in .c in any directory, and a
       regexp pattern of the form \.c$ will do the same. To root a regexp pat‐
       tern, start it with ^.

       Subdirectories  can  have their own .hgignore settings by adding subin‐
       clude:path/to/subdir/.hgignore to the root .hgignore. See hg help  pat‐
       terns for details on subinclude: and include:.

       Note   Patterns	specified  in  other than .hgignore are always rooted.
	      Please see hg help patterns for details.

   Example
       Here is an example ignore file.

       # use glob syntax.
       syntax: glob

       *.elc
       *.pyc
       *~

       # switch to regexp syntax.
       syntax: regexp
       ^\.pc/

CONFIGURING HGWEB
       Mercurial's internal web server,	 hgweb,	 can  serve  either  a	single
       repository,  or	a tree of repositories. In the second case, repository
       paths and global options can be defined using a dedicated configuration
       file common to hg serve, hgweb.wsgi, hgweb.cgi and hgweb.fcgi.

       This  file  uses the same syntax as other Mercurial configuration files
       but recognizes only the following sections:

	  · web

	  · paths

	  · collections

       The web options are thoroughly described in hg help config.

       The paths section maps URL  paths  to  paths  of	 repositories  in  the
       filesystem. hgweb will not expose the filesystem directly - only Mercu‐
       rial repositories can be published and only according to the configura‐
       tion.

       The  left  hand	side  is the path in the URL. Note that hgweb reserves
       subpaths like rev or file, try using different names for nested reposi‐
       tories to avoid confusing effects.

       The  right  hand	 side  is the path in the filesystem. If the specified
       path ends with * or ** the filesystem will be searched recursively  for
       repositories  below  that  point.   With * it will not recurse into the
       repositories it finds (except for .hg/patches).	With ** it  will  also
       search  inside  repository  working  directories and possibly find sub‐
       repositories.

       In this example:

       [paths]
       /projects/a = /srv/tmprepos/a
       /projects/b = c:/repos/b
       / = /srv/repos/*
       /user/bob = /home/bob/repos/**

       · The first two entries make two repositories in different  directories
	 appear under the same directory in the web interface

       · The  third  entry  will  publish  every Mercurial repository found in
	 /srv/repos/, for instance the repository /srv/repos/quux/ will appear
	 as http://server/quux/

       · The  fourth  entry will publish both http://server/user/bob/quux/ and
	 http://server/user/bob/quux/testsubrepo/

       The collections section is deprecated and has been superseded by paths.

   URLs and Common Arguments
       URLs under each repository have the form /{command}[/{arguments}] where
       {command}  represents  the name of a command or handler and {arguments}
       represents any number of additional URL parameters to that command.

       The web server has a default style associated with it. Styles map to  a
       collection  of  named templates. Each template is used to render a spe‐
       cific piece of data, such as a changeset or diff.

       The style for the current request can be overwritten two	 ways.	First,
       if  {command} contains a hyphen (-), the text before the hyphen defines
       the style. For example, /atom-log will render the log  command  handler
       with  the atom style. The second way to set the style is with the style
       query string argument. For example, /log?style=atom. The hyphenated URL
       parameter is preferred.

       Not  all	 templates  are	 available for all styles. Attempting to use a
       style that doesn't have all templates defined may result	 in  an	 error
       rendering the page.

       Many commands take a {revision} URL parameter. This defines the change‐
       set to operate on. This is commonly specified as the  short,  12	 digit
       hexadecimal  abbreviation  for  the  full  40 character unique revision
       identifier. However, any value described by hg help revisions typically
       works.

   Commands and URLs
       The following web commands and their URLs are available:

   /annotate/{revision}/{path}
       Show changeset information for each line in a file.

       The  ignorews,  ignorewsamount, ignorewseol, and ignoreblanklines query
       string arguments have the  same	meaning	 as  their  [annotate]	config
       equivalents.  It	 uses  the hgrc boolean parsing logic to interpret the
       value. e.g. 0 and false are false and 1	and  true  are	true.  If  not
       defined, the server default settings are used.

       The fileannotate template is rendered.

   /archive/{revision}.{format}[/{path}]
       Obtain an archive of repository content.

       The content and type of the archive is defined by a URL path parameter.
       format is the file extension of the archive type to be generated.  e.g.
       zip  or	tar.bz2.  Not  all archive types may be allowed by your server
       configuration.

       The optional path URL parameter controls content to include in the  ar‐
       chive.  If  omitted, every file in the specified revision is present in
       the archive. If included, only the specified file or  contents  of  the
       specified directory will be included in the archive.

       No template is used for this handler. Raw, binary content is generated.

   /bookmarks
       Show information about bookmarks.

       No arguments are accepted.

       The bookmarks template is rendered.

   /branches
       Show information about branches.

       All known branches are contained in the output, even closed branches.

       No arguments are accepted.

       The branches template is rendered.

   /changelog[/{revision}]
       Show information about multiple changesets.

       If  the optional revision URL argument is absent, information about all
       changesets starting at tip will be rendered. If the  revision  argument
       is  present, changesets will be shown starting from the specified revi‐
       sion.

       If revision is absent, the rev query string argument  may  be  defined.
       This will perform a search for changesets.

       The  argument  for  rev	can be a single revision, a revision set, or a
       literal keyword to search for in changeset data (equivalent to  hg  log
       -k).

       The  revcount  query  string  argument  defines	the maximum numbers of
       changesets to render.

       For non-searches, the changelog template will be rendered.

   /changeset[/{revision}]
       Show information about a single changeset.

       A URL path argument is the changeset identifier to show.	 See  hg  help
       revisions  for  possible values. If not defined, the tip changeset will
       be shown.

       The changeset template  is  rendered.  Contents	of  the	 changesettag,
       changesetbookmark,  filenodelink,  filenolink,  and  the many templates
       related to diffs may all be used to produce the output.

   /comparison/{revision}/{path}
       Show a comparison between the old and  new  versions  of	 a  file  from
       changes made on a particular revision.

       This  is	 similar  to  the  diff handler. However, this form features a
       split or side-by-side diff rather than a unified diff.

       The context query string argument can be used to control the  lines  of
       context in the diff.

       The filecomparison template is rendered.

   /diff/{revision}/{path}
       Show how a file changed in a particular commit.

       The filediff template is rendered.

       This  handler  is  registered under both the /diff and /filediff paths.
       /diff is used in modern code.

   /file/{revision}[/{path}]
       Show information about a directory or file in the repository.

       Info about the path given as a URL parameter will be rendered.

       If path is a directory, information about the entries in that directory
       will be rendered. This form is equivalent to the manifest handler.

       If  path	 is  a file, information about that file will be shown via the
       filerevision template.

       If path is not defined, information about the root  directory  will  be
       rendered.

   /diff/{revision}/{path}
       Show how a file changed in a particular commit.

       The filediff template is rendered.

       This  handler  is  registered under both the /diff and /filediff paths.
       /diff is used in modern code.

   /filelog/{revision}/{path}
       Show information about the history of a file in the repository.

       The revcount query string argument can be defined to control the	 maxi‐
       mum number of entries to show.

       The filelog template will be rendered.

   /graph[/{revision}]
       Show information about the graphical topology of the repository.

       Information  rendered by this handler can be used to create visual rep‐
       resentations of repository topology.

       The revision URL parameter controls the starting changeset.

       The revcount query string argument can define the number of  changesets
       to show information for.

       This handler will render the graph template.

   /help[/{topic}]
       Render help documentation.

       This  web  command  is  roughly	equivalent  to	hg help. If a topic is
       defined, that help topic will be rendered. If not, an index  of	avail‐
       able help topics will be rendered.

       The  help  template  will be rendered when requesting help for a topic.
       helptopics will be rendered for the index of help topics.

   /log[/{revision}[/{path}]]
       Show repository or file history.

       For URLs of the form /log/{revision}, a list of changesets starting  at
       the  specified  changeset  identifier  is  shown.  If {revision} is not
       defined, the default is tip. This form is equivalent to	the  changelog
       handler.

       For URLs of the form /log/{revision}/{file}, the history for a specific
       file will be shown. This form is equivalent to the filelog handler.

   /manifest[/{revision}[/{path}]]
       Show information about a directory.

       If the URL path arguments  are  omitted,	 information  about  the  root
       directory for the tip changeset will be shown.

       Because	this  handler can only show information for directories, it is
       recommended to use the file handler instead,  as	 it  can  handle  both
       directories and files.

       The manifest template will be rendered for this handler.

   /changeset[/{revision}]
       Show information about a single changeset.

       A  URL  path  argument is the changeset identifier to show. See hg help
       revisions for possible values. If not defined, the tip  changeset  will
       be shown.

       The  changeset  template	 is  rendered.	Contents  of the changesettag,
       changesetbookmark, filenodelink, filenolink,  and  the  many  templates
       related to diffs may all be used to produce the output.

   /shortlog
       Show basic information about a set of changesets.

       This  accepts  the  same	 parameters as the changelog handler. The only
       difference is the shortlog template will be  rendered  instead  of  the
       changelog template.

   /summary
       Show a summary of repository state.

       Information  about the latest changesets, bookmarks, tags, and branches
       is captured by this handler.

       The summary template is rendered.

   /tags
       Show information about tags.

       No arguments are accepted.

       The tags template is rendered.

TECHNICAL IMPLEMENTATION TOPICS
       To access a subtopic, use "hg help internals.{subtopic-name}"

	  bundles
		 Bundles

	  censor Censor

	  changegroups
		 Changegroups

	  config Config Registrar

	  requirements
		 Repository Requirements

	  revlogs
		 Revision Logs

	  wireprotocol
		 Wire Protocol

MERGE TOOLS
       To merge files Mercurial uses merge tools.

       A merge tool combines two different versions of a file  into  a	merged
       file.  Merge  tools  are	 given	the  two files and the greatest common
       ancestor of the two file versions, so they can  determine  the  changes
       made on both branches.

       Merge tools are used both for hg resolve, hg merge, hg update, hg back‐
       out and in several extensions.

       Usually, the merge tool tries to automatically reconcile the  files  by
       combining  all  non-overlapping changes that occurred separately in the
       two different evolutions of the same initial  base  file.  Furthermore,
       some interactive merge programs make it easier to manually resolve con‐
       flicting merges, either in a graphical way, or by inserting  some  con‐
       flict  markers.	Mercurial  does not include any interactive merge pro‐
       grams but relies on external tools for that.

   Available merge tools
       External merge  tools  and  their  properties  are  configured  in  the
       merge-tools  configuration  section  - see hgrc(5) - but they can often
       just be named by their executable.

       A merge tool is generally usable if its executable can be found on  the
       system and if it can handle the merge. The executable is found if it is
       an absolute or relative executable path or the name of  an  application
       in the executable search path. The tool is assumed to be able to handle
       the merge if it can handle symlinks if the file is a symlink, if it can
       handle binary files if the file is binary, and if a GUI is available if
       the tool requires a GUI.

       There are some internal merge tools which can  be  used.	 The  internal
       merge tools are:

       :dump

	      Creates  three  versions	of  the files to merge, containing the
	      contents of local, other and base. These files can then be  used
	      to  perform  a merge manually. If the file to be merged is named
	      a.txt,  these  files  will  accordingly  be  named  a.txt.local,
	      a.txt.other  and	a.txt.base and they will be placed in the same
	      directory as a.txt.

	      This implies premerge. Therefore, files aren't dumped,  if  pre‐
	      merge  runs successfully. Use :forcedump to forcibly write files
	      out.

       :fail

	      Rather than attempting to merge files that were modified on both
	      branches,	 it marks them as unresolved. The resolve command must
	      be used to resolve these conflicts.

       :forcedump

	      Creates three versions of the files as same as :dump, but	 omits
	      premerge.

       :local

	      Uses the local p1() version of files as the merged version.

       :merge

	      Uses  the	 internal  non-interactive  simple merge algorithm for
	      merging files. It will fail if there are any conflicts and leave
	      markers in the partially merged file. Markers will have two sec‐
	      tions, one for each side of merge.

       :merge-local

	      Like :merge, but	resolve	 all  conflicts	 non-interactively  in
	      favor of the local p1() changes.

       :merge-other

	      Like  :merge,  but  resolve  all	conflicts non-interactively in
	      favor of the other p2() changes.

       :merge3

	      Uses the internal non-interactive	 simple	 merge	algorithm  for
	      merging files. It will fail if there are any conflicts and leave
	      markers in the partially merged file.  Marker  will  have	 three
	      sections,	 one  from each side of the merge and one for the base
	      content.

       :other

	      Uses the other p2() version of files as the merged version.

       :prompt

	      Asks the user which of the local p1() or the other p2()  version
	      to keep as the merged version.

       :tagmerge

	      Uses the internal tag merge algorithm (experimental).

       :union

	      Uses  the	 internal  non-interactive  simple merge algorithm for
	      merging files. It will use both left and right  sides  for  con‐
	      flict regions.  No markers are inserted.

       Internal	 tools	are always available and do not require a GUI but will
       by default not handle symlinks or binary files.

   Choosing a merge tool
       Mercurial uses these rules when deciding which merge tool to use:

       1. If a tool has been specified with the	 --tool	 option	 to  merge  or
	  resolve, it is used.	If it is the name of a tool in the merge-tools
	  configuration, its configuration is used.  Otherwise	the  specified
	  tool must be executable by the shell.

       2. If  the  HGMERGE  environment variable is present, its value is used
	  and must be executable by the shell.

       3. If the filename of the file to be merged matches any of the patterns
	  in  the merge-patterns configuration section, the first usable merge
	  tool corresponding to a matching pattern is used. Here, binary capa‐
	  bilities of the merge tool are not considered.

       4. If  ui.merge	is set it will be considered next. If the value is not
	  the name of a configured tool, the specified value is used and  must
	  be  executable  by the shell. Otherwise the named tool is used if it
	  is usable.

       5. If any usable merge tools are present in the merge-tools  configura‐
	  tion section, the one with the highest priority is used.

       6. If  a program named hgmerge can be found on the system, it is used -
	  but it will by default not be used for symlinks and binary files.

       7. If the file to be merged is not binary and is not  a	symlink,  then
	  internal :merge is used.

       8. Otherwise, :prompt is used.

       Note   After  selecting	a  merge  program,  Mercurial  will by default
	      attempt to merge the files using a simple merge algorithm first.
	      Only  if	it doesn't succeed because of conflicting changes will
	      Mercurial actually execute the merge program. Whether to use the
	      simple  merge  algorithm first can be controlled by the premerge
	      setting of the merge tool. Premerge is enabled by default unless
	      the file is binary or a symlink.

       See  the merge-tools and ui sections of hgrc(5) for details on the con‐
       figuration of merge tools.

PAGER SUPPORT
       Some Mercurial commands can produce a lot of output, and Mercurial will
       attempt to use a pager to make those commands more pleasant.

       To set the pager that should be used, set the application variable:

       [pager]
       pager = less -FRX

       If  no  pager is set in the user or repository configuration, Mercurial
       uses the environment variable $PAGER. If $PAGER is not set, pager.pager
       from  the default or system configuration is used. If none of these are
       set, a default pager will be used, typically less on Unix and  more  on
       Windows.

       On  Windows,  more is not color aware, so using it effectively disables
       color.  MSYS and Cygwin shells provide less as a pager,	which  can  be
       configured   to	 support   ANSI	  color	  codes.   See	hg  help  con‐
       fig.color.pagermode to configure the color mode when invoking a pager.

       You can disable the pager for certain commands by adding	 them  to  the
       pager.ignore list:

       [pager]
       ignore = version, help, update

       To ignore global commands like hg version or hg help, you have to spec‐
       ify them in your user configuration file.

       To control whether the pager is used at all for an individual  command,
       you can use --pager=<value>:

	  · use as needed: auto.

	  · require the pager: yes or on.

	  · suppress  the  pager:  no or off (any unrecognized value will also
	    work).

       To globally turn off all attempts to use a pager, set:

       [ui]
       paginate = never

       which will prevent the pager from running.

FILE NAME PATTERNS
       Mercurial accepts several notations for identifying one or  more	 files
       at a time.

       By  default,  Mercurial	treats	filenames as shell-style extended glob
       patterns.

       Alternate pattern notations must be specified explicitly.

       Note   Patterns specified in .hgignore are not rooted.  Please  see  hg
	      help hgignore for details.

       To  use	a  plain path name without any pattern matching, start it with
       path:. These path names must completely match starting at  the  current
       repository root, and when the path points to a directory, it is matched
       recursively. To match all files in  a  directory	 non-recursively  (not
       including any files in subdirectories), rootfilesin: can be used, spec‐
       ifying an absolute path (relative to the repository root).

       To use an extended glob, start a name with glob:. Globs are  rooted  at
       the  current directory; a glob such as *.c will only match files in the
       current directory ending with .c.

       The supported glob syntax extensions are ** to match any string	across
       path separators and {a,b} to mean "a or b".

       To use a Perl/Python regular expression, start a name with re:.	Regexp
       pattern matching is anchored at the root of the repository.

       To read name patterns from a file, use listfile:	 or  listfile0:.   The
       latter  expects	null  delimited patterns while the former expects line
       feeds. Each string read from the file is itself treated as a file  pat‐
       tern.

       To  read	 a  set	 of patterns from a file, use include: or subinclude:.
       include: will use all the patterns from the given file and  treat  them
       as  if  they  had been passed in manually.  subinclude: will only apply
       the patterns against files that are under the subinclude file's	direc‐
       tory. See hg help hgignore for details on the format of these files.

       All patterns, except for glob: specified in command line (not for -I or
       -X options), can match also against directories:	 files	under  matched
       directories  are treated as matched.  For -I and -X options, glob: will
       match directories recursively.

       Plain examples:

       path:foo/bar	   a name bar in a directory named foo in the root
			   of the repository
       path:path:name	   a file or directory named "path:name"
       rootfilesin:foo/bar the files in a directory called foo/bar, but not any files
			   in its subdirectories and not a file bar in directory foo

       Glob examples:

       glob:*.c	      any name ending in ".c" in the current directory
       *.c	      any name ending in ".c" in the current directory
       **.c	      any name ending in ".c" in any subdirectory of the
		      current directory including itself.
       foo/*	      any file in directory foo
       foo/**	      any file in directory foo plus all its subdirectories,
		      recursively
       foo/*.c	      any name ending in ".c" in the directory foo
       foo/**.c	      any name ending in ".c" in any subdirectory of foo
		      including itself.

       Regexp examples:

       re:.*\.c$      any name ending in ".c", anywhere in the repository

       File examples:

       listfile:list.txt  read list from list.txt with one file pattern per line
       listfile0:list.txt read list from list.txt with null byte delimiters

       See also hg help filesets.

       Include examples:

       include:path/to/mypatternfile	reads patterns to be applied to all paths
       subinclude:path/to/subignorefile reads patterns specifically for paths in the
					subdirectory

WORKING WITH PHASES
   What are phases?
       Phases are a system for tracking which changesets have been  or	should
       be  shared.  This  helps prevent common mistakes when modifying history
       (for instance, with the mq or rebase extensions).

       Each changeset in a repository is in one of the following phases:

	  · public : changeset is visible on a public server

	  · draft : changeset is not yet published

	  · secret : changeset should not be pushed, pulled, or cloned

       These phases are ordered (public < draft < secret) and no changeset can
       be in a lower phase than its ancestors. For instance, if a changeset is
       public, all its ancestors are also  public.  Lastly,  changeset	phases
       should only be changed towards the public phase.

   How are phases managed?
       For  the	 most  part,  phases  should work transparently. By default, a
       changeset is created in the draft phase and is moved  into  the	public
       phase when it is pushed to another repository.

       Once  changesets	 become	 public,  extensions  like  mq and rebase will
       refuse to operate on them to  prevent  creating	duplicate  changesets.
       Phases  can  also  be manually manipulated with the hg phase command if
       needed. See hg help -v phase for examples.

       To make your commits secret by default, put this in your	 configuration
       file:

       [phases]
       new-commit = secret

   Phases and servers
       Normally, all servers are publishing by default. This means:

       - all draft changesets that are pulled or cloned appear in phase
       public on the client

       - all draft changesets that are pushed appear as public on both
       client and server

       - secret changesets are neither pushed, pulled, or cloned

       Note   Pulling a draft changeset from a publishing server does not mark
	      it as public on the server side due to the read-only  nature  of
	      pull.

       Sometimes  it may be desirable to push and pull changesets in the draft
       phase to share unfinished work. This can be done by setting  a  reposi‐
       tory to disable publishing in its configuration file:

       [phases]
       publish = False

       See hg help config for more information on configuration files.

       Note   Servers  running older versions of Mercurial are treated as pub‐
	      lishing.

       Note   Changesets in secret phase are not exchanged  with  the  server.
	      This  applies  to	 their content: file names, file contents, and
	      changeset metadata. For technical reasons, the identifier	 (e.g.
	      d825e4025e39) of the secret changeset may be communicated to the
	      server.

   Examples
	  · list changesets in draft or secret phase:

	    hg log -r "not public()"

	  · change all secret changesets to draft:

	    hg phase --draft "secret()"

	  · forcibly move the current changeset and descendants from public to
	    draft:

	    hg phase --force --draft .

	  · show a list of changeset revisions and each corresponding phase:

	    hg log --template "{rev} {phase}\n"

	  · resynchronize draft changesets relative to a remote repository:

	    hg phase -fd "outgoing(URL)"

       See hg help phase for more information on manually manipulating phases.

SPECIFYING REVISIONS
       Mercurial supports several ways to specify revisions.

   Specifying single revisions
       A  plain integer is treated as a revision number. Negative integers are
       treated as sequential offsets from the tip, with -1 denoting  the  tip,
       -2 denoting the revision prior to the tip, and so forth.

       A  40-digit  hexadecimal string is treated as a unique revision identi‐
       fier.  A hexadecimal string less than 40 characters long is treated  as
       a unique revision identifier and is referred to as a short-form identi‐
       fier. A short-form identifier is only valid if  it  is  the  prefix  of
       exactly one full-length identifier.

       Any other string is treated as a bookmark, tag, or branch name. A book‐
       mark is a movable pointer to a revision. A  tag	is  a  permanent  name
       associated  with	 a  revision.  A  branch name denotes the tipmost open
       branch head of that branch - or if they are  all	 closed,  the  tipmost
       closed  head  of	 the  branch. Bookmark, tag, and branch names must not
       contain the ":" character.

       The reserved name "tip" always identifies the most recent revision.

       The reserved name "null" indicates the null revision. This is the revi‐
       sion of an empty repository, and the parent of revision 0.

       The  reserved  name  "."	 indicates the working directory parent. If no
       working directory is checked out, it  is	 equivalent  to	 null.	If  an
       uncommitted merge is in progress, "." is the revision of the first par‐
       ent.

       Finally, commands that expect a single revision (like hg	 update)  also
       accept  revsets	(see below for details). When given a revset, they use
       the last revision of the revset. A few commands accept two single revi‐
       sions  (like  hg diff). When given a revset, they use the first and the
       last revisions of the revset.

   Specifying multiple revisions
       Mercurial supports a functional language for selecting a set  of	 revi‐
       sions. Expressions in this language are called revsets.

       The  language supports a number of predicates which are joined by infix
       operators. Parenthesis can be used for grouping.

       Identifiers such as branch names may need quoting with single or double
       quotes  if  they	 contain characters like - or if they match one of the
       predefined predicates.

       Special characters can be used in quoted identifiers by escaping	 them,
       e.g., \n is interpreted as a newline. To prevent them from being inter‐
       preted, strings can be prefixed with r, e.g. r'...'.

   Operators
       There is a single prefix operator:

       not x

	      Changesets not in x. Short form is ! x.

       These are the supported infix operators:

       x::y

	      A DAG range, meaning all changesets that are  descendants	 of  x
	      and  ancestors  of y, including x and y themselves. If the first
	      endpoint is left out, this is equivalent to ancestors(y), if the
	      second is left out it is equivalent to descendants(x).

	      An alternative syntax is x..y.

       x:y

	      All  changesets  with  revision  numbers	between	 x and y, both
	      inclusive. Either endpoint can be left out, they	default	 to  0
	      and tip.

       x and y

	      The intersection of changesets in x and y. Short form is x & y.

       x or y

	      The  union  of  changesets in x and y. There are two alternative
	      short forms: x | y and x + y.

       x - y

	      Changesets in x but not in y.

       x % y

	      Changesets that are ancestors of x but not ancestors of y	 (i.e.
	      ::x  -  ::y).   This  is	shorthand notation for only(x, y) (see
	      below). The second argument is optional and,  if	left  out,  is
	      equivalent to only(x).

       x^n

	      The  nth	parent of x, n == 0, 1, or 2.  For n == 0, x; for n ==
	      1, the first parent of each changeset in x; for n == 2, the sec‐
	      ond parent of changeset in x.

       x~n

	      The  nth first ancestor of x; x~0 is x; x~3 is x^^^.  For n < 0,
	      the nth unambiguous descendent of x.

       x ## y

	      Concatenate strings and identifiers into one string.

	      All other prefix, infix and postfix operators have lower	prior‐
	      ity  than	 ##.  For  example, a1 ## a2~2 is equivalent to (a1 ##
	      a2)~2.

	      For example:

	      [revsetalias]
	      issue(a1) = grep(r'\bissue[ :]?' ## a1 ## r'\b|\bbug\(' ## a1 ## r'\)')

	      issue(1234)      is      equivalent      to      grep(r'\bissue[
	      :]?1234\b|\bbug\(1234\)') in this case. This matches against all
	      of "issue 1234", "issue:1234", "issue1234" and "bug(1234)".

       There is a single postfix operator:

       x^

	      Equivalent to x^1, the first parent of each changeset in x.

   Patterns
       Where noted, predicates that perform string matching can accept a  pat‐
       tern  string. The pattern may be either a literal, or a regular expres‐
       sion. If the pattern starts with re:, the remainder of the  pattern  is
       treated as a regular expression. Otherwise, it is treated as a literal.
       To match a pattern that actually starts with re:, use the  prefix  lit‐
       eral:.

       Matching is case-sensitive, unless otherwise noted.  To perform a case-
       insensitive match on a case-sensitive predicate, use a regular  expres‐
       sion, prefixed with (?i).

       For  example,  tag(r're:(?i)release') matches "release" or "RELEASE" or
       "Release", etc.

   Predicates
       The following predicates are supported:

       adds(pattern)

	      Changesets that add a file matching pattern.

	      The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected	to  be
	      relative	to the current directory and match against a file or a
	      directory.

       all()

	      All changesets, the same as 0:tip.

       ancestor(*changeset)

	      A greatest common ancestor of the changesets.

	      Accepts 0 or more	 changesets.   Will  return  empty  list  when
	      passed  no args.	Greatest common ancestor of a single changeset
	      is that changeset.

       ancestors(set[, depth])

	      Changesets that are ancestors of changesets  in  set,  including
	      the given changesets themselves.

	      If depth is specified, the result only includes changesets up to
	      the specified generation.

       author(string)

	      Alias for user(string).

       bisect(string)

	      Changesets marked in the specified bisect status:

	      · good, bad, skip: csets explicitly marked as good/bad/skip

	      · goods, bads	 : csets topologically good/bad

	      · range		   : csets taking part in the bisection

	      · pruned		   : csets that are goods, bads or skipped

	      · untested	   : csets whose fate is yet unknown

	      · ignored		   : csets ignored due to DAG topology

	      · current		   : the cset currently being bisected

       bookmark([name])

	      The named bookmark or all bookmarks.

	      Pattern matching is  supported  for  name.  See  hg  help	 revi‐
	      sions.patterns.

       branch(string or set)

	      All  changesets belonging to the given branch or the branches of
	      the given changesets.

	      Pattern matching is supported for	 string.  See  hg  help	 revi‐
	      sions.patterns.

       branchpoint()

	      Changesets with more than one child.

       bundle()

	      Changesets in the bundle.

	      Bundle must be specified by the -R option.

       children(set)

	      Child changesets of changesets in set.

       closed()

	      Changeset is closed.

       contains(pattern)

	      The  revision's  manifest	 contains a file matching pattern (but
	      might not modify it). See hg help patterns for information about
	      file patterns.

	      The  pattern  without explicit kind like glob: is expected to be
	      relative to the current  directory  and  match  against  a  file
	      exactly for efficiency.

       converted([id])

	      Changesets converted from the given identifier in the old repos‐
	      itory if present, or all converted changesets if	no  identifier
	      is specified.

       date(interval)

	      Changesets within the interval, see hg help dates.

       desc(string)

	      Search commit message for string. The match is case-insensitive.

	      Pattern  matching	 is  supported	for  string. See hg help revi‐
	      sions.patterns.

       descendants(set[, depth])

	      Changesets which are descendants of changesets in set, including
	      the given changesets themselves.

	      If depth is specified, the result only includes changesets up to
	      the specified generation.

       destination([set])

	      Changesets that were created by a graft,	transplant  or	rebase
	      operation,  with	the  given  revisions specified as the source.
	      Omitting the optional set is the same as passing all().

       draft()

	      Changeset in draft phase.

       extinct()

	      Obsolete changesets with obsolete descendants only.

       extra(label, [value])

	      Changesets with the given label in the extra metadata, with  the
	      given optional value.

	      Pattern  matching	 is  supported	for  value.  See hg help revi‐
	      sions.patterns.

       file(pattern)

	      Changesets affecting files matched by pattern.

	      For a faster but less accurate result, consider using  filelog()
	      instead.

	      This predicate uses glob: as the default kind of pattern.

       filelog(pattern)

	      Changesets connected to the specified filelog.

	      For  performance reasons, visits only revisions mentioned in the
	      file-level filelog, rather than filtering through all changesets
	      (much faster, but doesn't include deletes or duplicate changes).
	      For a slower, more accurate result, use file().

	      The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected	to  be
	      relative	to  the	 current  directory  and  match against a file
	      exactly for efficiency.

	      If some linkrev points to	 revisions  filtered  by  the  current
	      repoview, we'll work around it to return a non-filtered value.

       first(set, [n])

	      An alias for limit().

       follow([pattern[, startrev]])

	      An  alias	 for  ::.  (ancestors of the working directory's first
	      parent).	If pattern is specified, the histories of files match‐
	      ing  given  pattern  in  the revision given by startrev are fol‐
	      lowed, including copies.

       followlines(file, fromline:toline[, startrev=., descend=False])

	      Changesets modifying file in line range ('fromline', 'toline').

	      Line range corresponds  to  'file'  content  at  'startrev'  and
	      should  hence  be	 consistent with file size. If startrev is not
	      specified, working directory's parent is used.

	      By default, ancestors of 'startrev' are returned.	 If  'descend'
	      is  True,	 descendants of 'startrev' are returned though renames
	      are (currently) not followed in this direction.

       grep(regex)

	      Like keyword(string) but accepts a regex.	 Use  grep(r'...')  to
	      ensure  special  escape characters are handled correctly. Unlike
	      keyword(string), the match is case-sensitive.

       head()

	      Changeset is a named branch head.

       heads(set)

	      Members of set with no children in set.

       hidden()

	      Hidden changesets.

       id(string)

	      Revision non-ambiguously specified by the given hex string  pre‐
	      fix.

       keyword(string)

	      Search commit message, user name, and names of changed files for
	      string. The match is case-insensitive.

	      For a regular expression	or  case  sensitive  search  of	 these
	      fields, use grep(regex).

       last(set, [n])

	      Last n members of set, defaulting to 1.

       limit(set[, n[, offset]])

	      First n members of set, defaulting to 1, starting from offset.

       matching(revision [, field])

	      Changesets  in  which  a	given  set  of fields match the set of
	      fields in the selected revision or set.

	      To match more than one field pass the list of  fields  to	 match
	      separated by spaces (e.g. author description).

	      Valid  fields  are most regular revision fields and some special
	      fields.

	      Regular revision fields are description, author,	branch,	 date,
	      files,  phase,  parents,	substate,  user	 and  diff.  Note that
	      author and user are synonyms. diff refers to the contents of the
	      revision.	 Two  revisions	 matching  their  diff will also match
	      their files.

	      Special fields are summary and  metadata:	 summary  matches  the
	      first line of the description.  metadata is equivalent to match‐
	      ing description user date (i.e. it  matches  the	main  metadata
	      fields).

	      metadata	is  the default field which is used when no fields are
	      specified. You can match more than one field at a time.

       max(set)

	      Changeset with highest revision number in set.

       merge()

	      Changeset is a merge changeset.

       min(set)

	      Changeset with lowest revision number in set.

       modifies(pattern)

	      Changesets modifying files matched by pattern.

	      The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected	to  be
	      relative	to the current directory and match against a file or a
	      directory.

       named(namespace)

	      The changesets in a given namespace.

	      Pattern matching is supported for namespace. See hg  help	 revi‐
	      sions.patterns.

       obsolete()

	      Mutable changeset with a newer version.

       only(set, [set])

	      Changesets  that	are  ancestors	of  the first set that are not
	      ancestors of any other head in the repo.	If  a  second  set  is
	      specified, the result is ancestors of the first set that are not
	      ancestors of the second set (i.e. ::<set1> - ::<set2>).

       origin([set])

	      Changesets that were specified  as  a  source  for  the  grafts,
	      transplants  or rebases that created the given revisions.	 Omit‐
	      ting the optional set is	the  same  as  passing	all().	 If  a
	      changeset	 created  by these operations is itself specified as a
	      source for one of these operations, only	the  source  changeset
	      for the first operation is selected.

       outgoing([path])

	      Changesets not found in the specified destination repository, or
	      the default push location.

       p1([set])

	      First parent of changesets in set, or the working directory.

       p2([set])

	      Second parent of changesets in set, or the working directory.

       parents([set])

	      The set of all parents for all changesets in set, or the working
	      directory.

       present(set)

	      An empty set, if any revision in set isn't found; otherwise, all
	      revisions in set.

	      If any of specified revisions is not present in the local repos‐
	      itory,  the query is normally aborted. But this predicate allows
	      the query to continue even in such cases.

       public()

	      Changeset in public phase.

       remote([id [,path]])

	      Local revision that corresponds to the  given  identifier	 in  a
	      remote  repository,  if  present.	 Here, the '.' identifier is a
	      synonym for the current local branch.

       removes(pattern)

	      Changesets which remove files matching pattern.

	      The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected	to  be
	      relative	to the current directory and match against a file or a
	      directory.

       rev(number)

	      Revision with the given numeric identifier.

       reverse(set)

	      Reverse order of set.

       roots(set)

	      Changesets in set with no parent changeset in set.

       secret()

	      Changeset in secret phase.

       sort(set[, [-]key... [, ...]])

	      Sort set by keys. The default sort order is ascending, specify a
	      key as -key to sort in descending order.

	      The keys can be:

	      · rev for the revision number,

	      · branch for the branch name,

	      · desc for the commit message (description),

	      · user for user name (author can be used as an alias),

	      · date for the commit date

	      · topo for a reverse topographical sort

	      The  topo	 sort  order  cannot be combined with other sort keys.
	      This sort takes one optional argument,  topo.firstbranch,	 which
	      takes  a	revset	that  specifies what topographical branches to
	      prioritize in the sort.

       subrepo([pattern])

	      Changesets that add, modify or remove the given subrepo.	If  no
	      subrepo pattern is named, any subrepo changes are returned.

       successors(set)

	      All successors for set, including the given set themselves

       tag([name])

	      The specified tag by name, or all tagged revisions if no name is
	      given.

	      Pattern matching is  supported  for  name.  See  hg  help	 revi‐
	      sions.patterns.

       user(string)

	      User name contains string. The match is case-insensitive.

	      Pattern  matching	 is  supported	for  string. See hg help revi‐
	      sions.patterns.

   Aliases
       New predicates (known as "aliases") can be defined, using any  combina‐
       tion of existing predicates or other aliases. An alias definition looks
       like:

       <alias> = <definition>

       in the revsetalias section of a Mercurial configuration file. Arguments
       of  the form a1, a2, etc. are substituted from the alias into the defi‐
       nition.

       For example,

       [revsetalias]
       h = heads()
       d(s) = sort(s, date)
       rs(s, k) = reverse(sort(s, k))

       defines three aliases, h, d,  and  rs.  rs(0:tip,  author)  is  exactly
       equivalent to reverse(sort(0:tip, author)).

   Equivalents
       Command line equivalents for hg log:

       -f    ->	 ::.
       -d x  ->	 date(x)
       -k x  ->	 keyword(x)
       -m    ->	 merge()
       -u x  ->	 user(x)
       -b x  ->	 branch(x)
       -P x  ->	 !::x
       -l x  ->	 limit(expr, x)

   Examples
       Some sample queries:

       · Changesets on the default branch:

	 hg log -r "branch(default)"

       · Changesets on the default branch since tag 1.5 (excluding merges):

	 hg log -r "branch(default) and 1.5:: and not merge()"

       · Open branch heads:

	 hg log -r "head() and not closed()"

       · Changesets  between  tags  1.3	 and  1.5 mentioning "bug" that affect
	 hgext/*:

	 hg log -r "1.3::1.5 and keyword(bug) and file('hgext/*')"

       · Changesets committed in May 2008, sorted by user:

	 hg log -r "sort(date('May 2008'), user)"

       · Changesets mentioning "bug" or "issue"	 that  are  not	 in  a	tagged
	 release:

	 hg log -r "(keyword(bug) or keyword(issue)) and not ancestors(tag())"

       · Update to the commit that bookmark @ is pointing to, without activat‐
	 ing the bookmark (this works because the last revision of the	revset
	 is used):

	 hg update :@

       · Show  diff between tags 1.3 and 1.5 (this works because the first and
	 the last revisions of the revset are used):

	 hg diff -r 1.3::1.5

USING MERCURIAL FROM SCRIPTS AND AUTOMATION
       It is common for machines (as opposed to humans) to consume  Mercurial.
       This  help  topic  describes some of the considerations for interfacing
       machines with Mercurial.

   Choosing an Interface
       Machines have a choice of several methods to interface with  Mercurial.
       These include:

       · Executing the hg process

       · Querying a HTTP server

       · Calling out to a command server

       Executing hg processes is very similar to how humans interact with Mer‐
       curial in the shell. It should already be familiar to you.

       hg serve can be used to start a server. By default, this will  start  a
       "hgweb"	HTTP server. This HTTP server has support for machine-readable
       output, such as JSON. For more, see hg help hgweb.

       hg serve can also start a "command server." Clients can connect to this
       server  and issue Mercurial commands over a special protocol.  For more
       details on the command server, including links to client libraries, see
       https://www.mercurial-scm.org/wiki/CommandServer.

       hg  serve based	interfaces  (the  hgweb	 and command servers) have the
       advantage over simple hg process invocations in that  they  are	likely
       more  efficient. This is because there is significant overhead to spawn
       new Python processes.

       Tip    If you need to invoke several hg processes in short order and/or
	      performance is important to you, use of a server-based interface
	      is highly recommended.

   Environment Variables
       As documented in hg help	 environment,  various	environment  variables
       influence  the  operation  of Mercurial. The following are particularly
       relevant for machines consuming Mercurial:

       HGPLAIN
	      If not set, Mercurial's output could be influenced by configura‐
	      tion  settings that impact its encoding, verbose mode, localiza‐
	      tion, etc.

	      It is highly recommended for machines to set this variable  when
	      invoking hg processes.

       HGENCODING
	      If  not  set, the locale used by Mercurial will be detected from
	      the environment. If the determined locale does not support  dis‐
	      play of certain characters, Mercurial may render these character
	      sequences incorrectly (often by using "?" as a  placeholder  for
	      invalid characters in the current locale).

	      Explicitly  setting this environment variable is a good practice
	      to guarantee consistent results. "utf-8" is  a  good  choice  on
	      UNIX-like environments.

       HGRCPATH
	      If  not  set,  Mercurial will inherit config options from config
	      files using the  process	described  in  hg  help	 config.  This
	      includes inheriting user or system-wide config files.

	      When utmost control over the Mercurial configuration is desired,
	      the value of HGRCPATH can be set to an explicit file with	 known
	      good  configs.  In  rare cases, the value can be set to an empty
	      file or the null device (often /dev/null) to bypass  loading  of
	      any  user or system config files. Note that these approaches can
	      have unintended consequences, as	the  user  and	system	config
	      files  often define things like the username and extensions that
	      may be required to interface with a repository.

   Consuming Command Output
       It is common for machines to need to parse the output of Mercurial com‐
       mands  for relevant data. This section describes the various techniques
       for doing so.

   Parsing Raw Command Output
       Likely the simplest and most effective solution for  consuming  command
       output is to simply invoke hg commands as you would as a user and parse
       their output.

       The output of many commands can easily be parsed with tools like	 grep,
       sed, and awk.

       A  potential downside with parsing command output is that the output of
       commands can change when Mercurial is upgraded.	While  Mercurial  does
       generally  strive  for  strong  backwards compatibility, command output
       does occasionally change. Having tests for your automated  interactions
       with  hg	 commands is generally recommended, but is even more important
       when raw command output parsing is involved.

   Using Templates to Control Output
       Many hg commands support templatized output via the -T/--template argu‐
       ment. For more, see hg help templates.

       Templates  are useful for explicitly controlling output so that you get
       exactly the data you want formatted how you want it. For	 example,  log
       -T  {node}\n can be used to print a newline delimited list of changeset
       nodes instead of a human-tailored  output  containing  authors,	dates,
       descriptions, etc.

       Tip    If parsing raw command output is too complicated, consider using
	      templates to make your life easier.

       The -T/--template argument allows specifying pre-defined styles.	  Mer‐
       curial  ships with the machine-readable styles json and xml, which pro‐
       vide JSON and XML output, respectively. These are useful for  producing
       output that is machine readable as-is.

       Important
	      The  json and xml styles are considered experimental. While they
	      may be attractive to use for easily  obtaining  machine-readable
	      output, their behavior may change in subsequent versions.

	      These  styles  may  also exhibit unexpected results when dealing
	      with certain encodings. Mercurial treats things  like  filenames
	      as  a  series of bytes and normalizing certain byte sequences to
	      JSON or XML with certain encoding	 settings  can	lead  to  sur‐
	      prises.

   Command Server Output
       If  using the command server to interact with Mercurial, you are likely
       using an existing library/API that abstracts implementation details  of
       the command server. If so, this interface layer may perform parsing for
       you, saving you the work of implementing it yourself.

   Output Verbosity
       Commands often have varying output verbosity, even when	machine	 read‐
       able  styles  are  being	 used  (e.g. -T json). Adding -v/--verbose and
       --debug to the command's arguments can  increase	 the  amount  of  data
       exposed by Mercurial.

       An alternate way to get the data you need is by explicitly specifying a
       template.

   Other Topics
       revsets
	      Revisions sets is a functional query language  for  selecting  a
	      set of revisions. Think of it as SQL for Mercurial repositories.
	      Revsets are useful for querying repositories for specific data.

	      See hg help revsets for more.

       share extension
	      The share extension provides functionality for  sharing  reposi‐
	      tory  data  across several working copies. It can even automati‐
	      cally "pool" storage for	logically  related  repositories  when
	      cloning.

	      Configuring the share extension can lead to significant resource
	      utilization reduction, particularly around disk  space  and  the
	      network. This is especially true for continuous integration (CI)
	      environments.

	      See hg help -e share for more.

SUBREPOSITORIES
       Subrepositories let you nest external repositories or projects  into  a
       parent  Mercurial  repository,  and  make commands operate on them as a
       group.

       Mercurial currently supports Mercurial, Git, and Subversion  subreposi‐
       tories.

       Subrepositories are made of three components:

       1. Nested  repository checkouts. They can appear anywhere in the parent
	  working directory.

       2. Nested repository references. They  are  defined  in	.hgsub,	 which
	  should  be  placed  in the root of working directory, and tell where
	  the subrepository checkouts come from. Mercurial subrepositories are
	  referenced like:

	  path/to/nested = https://example.com/nested/repo/path

	  Git and Subversion subrepos are also supported:

	  path/to/nested = [git]git://example.com/nested/repo/path
	  path/to/nested = [svn]https://example.com/nested/trunk/path

	  where path/to/nested is the checkout location relatively to the par‐
	  ent Mercurial root, and https://example.com/nested/repo/path is  the
	  source  repository  path. The source can also reference a filesystem
	  path.

	  Note that .hgsub does not exist by default  in  Mercurial  reposito‐
	  ries,	 you have to create and add it to the parent repository before
	  using subrepositories.

       3. Nested repository states. They are defined in .hgsubstate, which  is
	  placed in the root of working directory, and capture whatever infor‐
	  mation is required to restore the subrepositories to the state  they
	  were committed in a parent repository changeset. Mercurial automati‐
	  cally record the nested repositories states when committing  in  the
	  parent repository.

       Note
	  The .hgsubstate file should not be edited manually.

   Adding a Subrepository
       If  .hgsub  does	 not exist, create it and add it to the parent reposi‐
       tory. Clone or checkout the external projects where you want it to live
       in  the	parent repository. Edit .hgsub and add the subrepository entry
       as described above. At this point, the subrepository is tracked and the
       next  commit  will  record  its state in .hgsubstate and bind it to the
       committed changeset.

   Synchronizing a Subrepository
       Subrepos do not automatically  track  the  latest  changeset  of	 their
       sources.	 Instead,  they	 are updated to the changeset that corresponds
       with the changeset checked out in the top-level changeset. This	is  so
       developers always get a consistent set of compatible code and libraries
       when they update.

       Thus, updating subrepos is a manual process. Simply  check  out	target
       subrepo	at the desired revision, test in the top-level repo, then com‐
       mit in the parent repository to record the new combination.

   Deleting a Subrepository
       To remove a subrepository from the parent repository, delete its refer‐
       ence from .hgsub, then remove its files.

   Interaction with Mercurial Commands
       add    add  does not recurse in subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is speci‐
	      fied.  However, if you specify the full path of a file in a sub‐
	      repo,  it	 will  be  added even without -S/--subrepos specified.
	      Subversion subrepositories are currently silently ignored.

       addremove
	      addremove does not recurse into subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is
	      specified.  However, if you specify the full path of a directory
	      in a subrepo, addremove will be performed	 on  it	 even  without
	      -S/--subrepos  being specified.  Git and Subversion subreposito‐
	      ries will print a warning and continue.

       archive
	      archive does not recurse in subrepositories unless -S/--subrepos
	      is specified.

       cat    cat currently only handles exact file matches in subrepos.  Sub‐
	      version subrepositories are currently ignored.

       commit commit creates a consistent snapshot of the state of the	entire
	      project  and  its	 subrepositories.  If any subrepositories have
	      been modified, Mercurial will abort.  Mercurial can be  made  to
	      instead	commit	all  modified  subrepositories	by  specifying
	      -S/--subrepos, or setting "ui.commitsubrepos=True" in a configu‐
	      ration file (see hg help config).	 After there are no longer any
	      modified subrepositories, it records  their  state  and  finally
	      commits  it  in  the  parent repository.	The --addremove option
	      also honors the -S/--subrepos option.  However, Git and  Subver‐
	      sion subrepositories will print a warning and abort.

       diff   diff does not recurse in subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is speci‐
	      fied. Changes are displayed as  usual,  on  the  subrepositories
	      elements.	 Subversion  subrepositories  are  currently  silently
	      ignored.

       files  files does not recurse into  subrepos  unless  -S/--subrepos  is
	      specified.   However,  if you specify the full path of a file or
	      directory in a  subrepo,	it  will  be  displayed	 even  without
	      -S/--subrepos  being specified.  Git and Subversion subreposito‐
	      ries are currently silently ignored.

       forget forget currently only handles exact file	matches	 in  subrepos.
	      Git   and	 Subversion  subrepositories  are  currently  silently
	      ignored.

       incoming
	      incoming does not recurse in subrepos  unless  -S/--subrepos  is
	      specified.  Git  and  Subversion	subrepositories	 are currently
	      silently ignored.

       outgoing
	      outgoing does not recurse in subrepos  unless  -S/--subrepos  is
	      specified.  Git  and  Subversion	subrepositories	 are currently
	      silently ignored.

       pull   pull is not recursive since it is not clear what to  pull	 prior
	      to running hg update. Listing and retrieving all subrepositories
	      changes referenced by the parent repository pulled changesets is
	      expensive at best, impossible in the Subversion case.

       push   Mercurial will automatically push all subrepositories first when
	      the parent repository is being pushed.  This  ensures  new  sub‐
	      repository  changes  are	available when referenced by top-level
	      repositories.  Push is a no-op for Subversion subrepositories.

       serve  serve does not recurse into subrepositories unless -S/--subrepos
	      is  specified.  Git and Subversion subrepositories are currently
	      silently ignored.

       status status does not recurse into subrepositories unless  -S/--subre‐
	      pos is specified. Subrepository changes are displayed as regular
	      Mercurial changes on the subrepository elements. Subversion sub‐
	      repositories are currently silently ignored.

       remove remove  does not recurse into subrepositories unless -S/--subre‐
	      pos is specified.	 However, if you specify a file	 or  directory
	      path  in	a subrepo, it will be removed even without -S/--subre‐
	      pos.  Git and Subversion subrepositories are currently  silently
	      ignored.

       update update  restores	the subrepos in the state they were originally
	      committed in target changeset. If the recorded changeset is  not
	      available	 in  the current subrepository, Mercurial will pull it
	      in first before updating.	 This means that updating can  require
	      network access when using subrepositories.

   Remapping Subrepositories Sources
       A  subrepository	 source	 location  may	change	during a project life,
       invalidating references stored in the parent repository history. To fix
       this,  rewriting rules can be defined in parent repository hgrc file or
       in Mercurial configuration. See the [subpaths] section in  hgrc(5)  for
       more details.

TEMPLATE USAGE
       Mercurial allows you to customize output of commands through templates.
       You can either pass in a template or select an existing	template-style
       from the command line, via the --template option.

       You  can	 customize  output  for any "log-like" command: log, outgoing,
       incoming, tip, parents, and heads.

       Some built-in styles are packaged with Mercurial. These can  be	listed
       with hg log --template list. Example usage:

       $ hg log -r1.0::1.1 --template changelog

       A  template  is	a piece of text, with markup to invoke variable expan‐
       sion:

       $ hg log -r1 --template "{node}\n"
       b56ce7b07c52de7d5fd79fb89701ea538af65746

   Keywords
       Strings in curly braces are called keywords. The availability  of  key‐
       words depends on the exact context of the templater. These keywords are
       usually available for templating a log-like command:

       activebookmark
	      String. The active  bookmark,  if	 it  is	 associated  with  the
	      changeset.

       author String. The unmodified author of the changeset.

       bisect String. The changeset bisection status.

       bookmarks
	      List  of	strings.  Any bookmarks associated with the changeset.
	      Also sets 'active', the name of the active bookmark.

       branch String. The name of the branch on which the changeset  was  com‐
	      mitted.

       changessincelatesttag
	      Integer. All ancestors not in the latest tag.

       children
	      List of strings. The children of the changeset.

       date   Date information. The date when the changeset was committed.

       desc   String. The text of the changeset description.

       diffstat
	      String.  Statistics of changes with the following format: "modi‐
	      fied files: +added/-removed lines"

       extras List of dicts with key, value entries of the 'extras'  field  of
	      this changeset.

       file_adds
	      List of strings. Files added by this changeset.

       file_copies
	      List  of	strings.  Files	 copied	 in  this changeset with their
	      sources.

       file_copies_switch
	      List of strings. Like "file_copies" but displayed	 only  if  the
	      --copied switch is set.

       file_dels
	      List of strings. Files removed by this changeset.

       file_mods
	      List of strings. Files modified by this changeset.

       files  List  of	strings. All files modified, added, or removed by this
	      changeset.

       graphnode
	      String. The character representing  the  changeset  node	in  an
	      ASCII revision graph.

       graphwidth
	      Integer. The width of the graph drawn by 'log --graph' or zero.

       index  Integer. The current iteration of the loop. (0 indexed)

       latesttag
	      List  of	strings.  The  global tags on the most recent globally
	      tagged ancestor of this changeset.  If no such tags  exist,  the
	      list consists of the single string "null".

       latesttagdistance
	      Integer. Longest path to the latest tag.

       namespaces
	      Dict of lists. Names attached to this changeset per namespace.

       node   String.  The  changeset identification hash, as a 40 hexadecimal
	      digit string.

       p1node String. The identification hash of the changeset's first parent,
	      as  a  40 digit hexadecimal string. If the changeset has no par‐
	      ents, all digits are 0.

       p1rev  Integer. The repository-local revision number of the changeset's
	      first parent, or -1 if the changeset has no parents.

       p2node String.  The  identification hash of the changeset's second par‐
	      ent, as a 40 digit hexadecimal string. If the changeset  has  no
	      second parent, all digits are 0.

       p2rev  Integer. The repository-local revision number of the changeset's
	      second parent, or -1 if the changeset has no second parent.

       parents
	      List of strings. The parents of the changeset in "rev:node" for‐
	      mat.  If the changeset has only one "natural" parent (the prede‐
	      cessor revision) nothing is shown.

       peerurls
	      A dictionary of repository locations defined in the [paths] sec‐
	      tion of your configuration file.

       phase  String. The changeset phase name.

       phaseidx
	      Integer. The changeset phase index.

       rev    Integer. The repository-local changeset revision number.

       subrepos
	      List of strings. Updated subrepositories in the changeset.

       tags   List of strings. Any tags associated with the changeset.

       termwidth
	      Integer. The width of the current terminal.

       The  "date" keyword does not produce human-readable output. If you want
       to use a date in your output, you can use a filter to process it.  Fil‐
       ters  are  functions which return a string based on the input variable.
       Be sure to use the  stringify  filter  first  when  you're  applying  a
       string-input  filter to a list-like input variable.  You can also use a
       chain of filters to get the desired output:

       $ hg tip --template "{date|isodate}\n"
       2008-08-21 18:22 +0000

   Filters
       List of filters:

       addbreaks
	      Any text. Add an XHTML "<br />" tag before the end of every line
	      except the last.

       age    Date.  Returns a human-readable date/time difference between the
	      given date/time and the current date/time.

       basename
	      Any text. Treats the text as a path, and returns the last compo‐
	      nent of the path after splitting by the path separator (ignoring
	      trailing separators). For example, "foo/bar/baz"	becomes	 "baz"
	      and "foo/bar//" becomes "bar".

       count  List or text. Returns the length as an integer.

       domain Any  text.  Finds	 the  first  string  that  looks like an email
	      address, and extracts just the domain component.	Example:  User
	      <user@example.com> becomes example.com.

       email  Any  text.  Extracts  the	 first string that looks like an email
	      address. Example:	 User  <user@example.com>  becomes  user@exam‐
	      ple.com.

       emailuser
	      Any text. Returns the user portion of an email address.

       escape Any text. Replaces the special XML/XHTML characters "&", "<" and
	      ">" with XML entities, and filters out NUL characters.

       fill68 Any text. Wraps the text to fit in 68 columns.

       fill76 Any text. Wraps the text to fit in 76 columns.

       firstline
	      Any text. Returns the first line of text.

       hex    Any text. Convert a binary Mercurial node	 identifier  into  its
	      long hexadecimal representation.

       hgdate Date.  Returns the date as a pair of numbers: "1157407993 25200"
	      (Unix timestamp, timezone offset).

       isodate
	      Date. Returns the date in ISO  8601  format:  "2009-08-18	 13:00
	      +0200".

       isodatesec
	      Date.  Returns  the  date in ISO 8601 format, including seconds:
	      "2009-08-18 13:00:13 +0200". See also the rfc3339date filter.

       lower  Any text. Converts the text to lowercase.

       nonempty
	      Any text. Returns '(none)' if the string is empty.

       obfuscate
	      Any text. Returns the input text rendered as a sequence  of  XML
	      entities.

       person Any text. Returns the name before an email address, interpreting
	      it as per RFC 5322.

       revescape
	      Any text. Escapes all "special" characters, except  @.   Forward
	      slashes  are  escaped  twice  to prevent web servers from prema‐
	      turely unescaping them.  For  example,  "@foo  bar/baz"  becomes
	      "@foo%20bar%252Fbaz".

       rfc3339date
	      Date. Returns a date using the Internet date format specified in
	      RFC 3339: "2009-08-18T13:00:13+02:00".

       rfc822date
	      Date. Returns a date using the same format used in  email	 head‐
	      ers: "Tue, 18 Aug 2009 13:00:13 +0200".

       short  Changeset hash. Returns the short form of a changeset hash, i.e.
	      a 12 hexadecimal digit string.

       shortbisect
	      Any text. Treats text as a bisection status, and returns a  sin‐
	      gle-character  representing  the	status	(G:  good,  B: bad, S:
	      skipped, U: untested, I: ignored). Returns single space if  text
	      is not a valid bisection status.

       shortdate
	      Date. Returns a date like "2006-09-18".

       splitlines
	      Any text. Split text into a list of lines.

       stringify
	      Any  type.  Turns	 the value into text by converting values into
	      text and concatenating them.

       stripdir
	      Treat the text as path and strip a directory level, if possible.
	      For example, "foo" and "foo/bar" becomes "foo".

       tabindent
	      Any text. Returns the text, with every non-empty line except the
	      first starting with a tab character.

       upper  Any text. Converts the text to uppercase.

       urlescape
	      Any text. Escapes all "special" characters.  For	example,  "foo
	      bar" becomes "foo%20bar".

       user   Any text. Returns a short representation of a user name or email
	      address.

       utf8   Any text. Converts from the local character encoding to UTF-8.

       Note that  a  filter  is	 nothing  more	than  a	 function  call,  i.e.
       expr|filter is equivalent to filter(expr).

   Functions
       In addition to filters, there are some basic built-in functions:

       date(date[, fmt])
	      Format  a	 date.	See  hg help dates for formatting strings. The
	      default is a Unix date format, including the timezone: "Mon  Sep
	      04 15:13:13 2006 0700".

       dict([[key=]value...])
	      Construct a dict from key-value pairs. A key may be omitted if a
	      value expression can provide an unambiguous name.

       diff([includepattern [, excludepattern]])
	      Show a diff, optionally specifying files to include or exclude.

       files(pattern)
	      All files of the current changeset matching the pattern. See  hg
	      help patterns.

       fill(text[, width[, initialident[, hangindent]]])
	      Fill  many  paragraphs with optional indentation. See the "fill"
	      filter.

       get(dict, key)
	      Get an attribute/key from an object. Some keywords  are  complex
	      types.  This  function  allows  you  to  obtain  the value of an
	      attribute on these types.

       if(expr, then[, else])
	      Conditionally execute based on the result of an expression.

       ifcontains(needle, haystack, then[, else])
	      Conditionally execute based on whether the item "needle"	is  in
	      "haystack".

       ifeq(expr1, expr2, then[, else])
	      Conditionally execute based on whether 2 items are equivalent.

       indent(text, indentchars[, firstline])
	      Indents  all  non-empty  lines  with the characters given in the
	      indentchars string. An optional third  parameter	will  override
	      the indent for the first line only if present.

       join(list, sep)
	      Join items in a list with a delimiter.

       label(label, expr)
	      Apply a label to generated content. Content with a label applied
	      can result in additional post-processing, such as automatic col‐
	      orization.

       latesttag([pattern])
	      The  global  tags	 matching the given pattern on the most recent
	      globally tagged ancestor of this changeset.   If	no  such  tags
	      exist, the "{tag}" template resolves to the string "null".

       localdate(date[, tz])
	      Converts a date to the specified timezone.  The default is local
	      date.

       max(iterable)
	      Return the max of an iterable

       min(iterable)
	      Return the min of an iterable

       mod(a, b)
	      Calculate a mod b such that a / b + a mod b == a

       pad(text, width[, fillchar=' '[, left=False]])
	      Pad text with a fill character.

       relpath(path)
	      Convert a repository-absolute path into a filesystem path	 rela‐
	      tive to the current working directory.

       revset(query[, formatargs...])
	      Execute a revision set query. See hg help revset.

       rstdoc(text, style)
	      Format reStructuredText.

       separate(sep, args)
	      Add a separator between non-empty arguments.

       shortest(node, minlength=4)
	      Obtain the shortest representation of a node.

       startswith(pattern, text)
	      Returns the value from the "text" argument if it begins with the
	      content from the "pattern" argument.

       strip(text[, chars])
	      Strip characters from a string. By default, strips  all  leading
	      and trailing whitespace.

       sub(pattern, replacement, expression)
	      Perform text substitution using regular expressions.

       word(number, text[, separator])
	      Return the nth word from a string.

   Operators
       We provide a limited set of infix arithmetic operations on integers:

       + for addition
       - for subtraction
       * for multiplication
       / for floor division (division rounded to integer nearest -infinity)

       Division fulfills the law x = x / y + mod(x, y).

       Also, for any expression that returns a list, there is a list operator:

       expr % "{template}"

       As  seen in the above example, {template} is interpreted as a template.
       To prevent it from being interpreted, you can use an  escape  character
       \{ or a raw string prefix, r'...'.

       The dot operator can be used as a shorthand for accessing a sub item:

       · expr.member  is  roughly  equivalent  to  expr	 %  '{member}' if expr
	 returns a non-list/dict. The returned value is not stringified.

       · dict.key is identical to get(dict, 'key').

   Aliases
       New keywords and functions can be defined in the templatealias  section
       of a Mercurial configuration file:

       <alias> = <definition>

       Arguments  of the form a1, a2, etc. are substituted from the alias into
       the definition.

       For example,

       [templatealias]
       r = rev
       rn = "{r}:{node|short}"
       leftpad(s, w) = pad(s, w, ' ', True)

       defines two symbol aliases, r and rn, and a function alias leftpad().

       It's also possible to specify complete template strings, using the tem‐
       plates section. The syntax used is the general template string syntax.

       For example,

       [templates]
       nodedate = "{node|short}: {date(date, "%Y-%m-%d")}\n"

       defines a template, nodedate, which can be called like:

       $ hg log -r . -Tnodedate

       A  template  defined  in	 templates section can also be referenced from
       another template:

       $ hg log -r . -T "{rev} {nodedate}"

       but be aware that the keywords cannot be overridden by  templates.  For
       example,	 a  template  defined as templates.rev cannot be referenced as
       {rev}.

       A template defined in templates section may have	 sub  templates	 which
       are inserted before/after/between items:

       [templates]
       myjson = ' {dict(rev, node|short)|json}'
       myjson:docheader = '\{\n'
       myjson:docfooter = '\n}\n'
       myjson:separator = ',\n'

   Examples
       Some sample command line templates:

       · Format lists, e.g. files:

	 $ hg log -r 0 --template "files:\n{files % '  {file}\n'}"

       · Join the list of files with a ", ":

	 $ hg log -r 0 --template "files: {join(files, ', ')}\n"

       · Join the list of files ending with ".py" with a ", ":

	 $ hg log -r 0 --template "pythonfiles: {join(files('**.py'), ', ')}\n"

       · Separate non-empty arguments by a " ":

	 $ hg log -r 0 --template "{separate(' ', node, bookmarks, tags}\n"

       · Modify each line of a commit description:

	 $ hg log --template "{splitlines(desc) % '**** {line}\n'}"

       · Format date:

	 $ hg log -r 0 --template "{date(date, '%Y')}\n"

       · Display date in UTC:

	 $ hg log -r 0 --template "{localdate(date, 'UTC')|date}\n"

       · Output the description set to a fill-width of 30:

	 $ hg log -r 0 --template "{fill(desc, 30)}"

       · Use a conditional to test for the default branch:

	 $ hg log -r 0 --template "{ifeq(branch, 'default', 'on the main branch',
	 'on branch {branch}')}\n"

       · Append a newline if not empty:

	 $ hg tip --template "{if(author, '{author}\n')}"

       · Label the output for use with the color extension:

	 $ hg log -r 0 --template "{label('changeset.{phase}', node|short)}\n"

       · Invert the firstline filter, i.e. everything but the first line:

	 $ hg log -r 0 --template "{sub(r'^.*\n?\n?', '', desc)}\n"

       · Display the contents of the 'extra' field, one per line:

	 $ hg log -r 0 --template "{join(extras, '\n')}\n"

       · Mark the active bookmark with '*':

	 $ hg log --template "{bookmarks % '{bookmark}{ifeq(bookmark, active, '*')} '}\n"

       · Find  the  previous  release  candidate tag, the distance and changes
	 since the tag:

	 $ hg log -r . --template "{latesttag('re:^.*-rc$') % '{tag}, {changes}, {distance}'}\n"

       · Mark the working copy parent with '@':

	 $ hg log --template "{ifcontains(rev, revset('.'), '@')}\n"

       · Show details of parent revisions:

	 $ hg log --template "{revset('parents(%d)', rev) % '{desc|firstline}\n'}"

       · Show only commit descriptions that start with "template":

	 $ hg log --template "{startswith('template', firstline(desc))}\n"

       · Print the first word of each line of a commit message:

	 $ hg log --template "{word(0, desc)}\n"

URL PATHS
       Valid URLs are of the form:

       local/filesystem/path[#revision]
       file://local/filesystem/path[#revision]
       http://[user[:pass]@]host[:port]/[path][#revision]
       https://[user[:pass]@]host[:port]/[path][#revision]
       ssh://[user@]host[:port]/[path][#revision]

       Paths in the local filesystem can either point to  Mercurial  reposito‐
       ries  or to bundle files (as created by hg bundle or hg incoming --bun‐
       dle). See also hg help paths.

       An optional identifier after # indicates a particular branch,  tag,  or
       changeset to use from the remote repository. See also hg help revisions
       .

       Some features, such as pushing to http:// and  https:// URLs  are  only
       possible	 if  the feature is explicitly enabled on the remote Mercurial
       server.

       Note that the security of HTTPS URLs depends on proper configuration of
       web.cacerts.

       Some notes about using SSH with Mercurial:

       · SSH  requires	an accessible shell account on the destination machine
	 and a copy of hg in the remote path or specified with as remotecmd.

       · path is relative to the remote user's home directory by default.  Use
	 an extra slash at the start of a path to specify an absolute path:

	 ssh://example.com//tmp/repository

       · Mercurial doesn't use its own compression via SSH; the right thing to
	 do is to configure it in your ~/.ssh/config, e.g.:

	 Host *.mylocalnetwork.example.com
	   Compression no
	 Host *
	   Compression yes

	 Alternatively specify "ssh -C" as your ssh command in your configura‐
	 tion file or with the --ssh command line option.

       These  URLs  can	 all  be  stored  in your configuration file with path
       aliases under the [paths] section like so:

       [paths]
       alias1 = URL1
       alias2 = URL2
       ...

       You can then use the alias for any command that uses a URL (for example
       hg pull alias1 will be treated as hg pull URL1).

       Two path aliases are special because they are used as defaults when you
       do not provide the URL to a command:

       default:
	      When you create a repository with hg clone,  the	clone  command
	      saves  the  location of the source repository as the new reposi‐
	      tory's 'default' path. This is then used when you omit path from
	      push- and pull-like commands (including incoming and outgoing).

       default-push:
	      The  push command will look for a path named 'default-push', and
	      prefer it over 'default' if both are defined.

EXTENSIONS
       This section contains help for extensions that are distributed together
       with Mercurial. Help for other extensions is available in the help sys‐
       tem.

   acl
       hooks for controlling repository access

       This hook makes it possible to allow or	deny  write  access  to	 given
       branches	 and  paths of a repository when receiving incoming changesets
       via pretxnchangegroup and pretxncommit.

       The authorization is matched based on the local user name on the system
       where  the  hook	 runs, and not the committer of the original changeset
       (since the latter is merely informative).

       The acl hook is best used along with a restricted shell like hgsh, pre‐
       venting	authenticating users from doing anything other than pushing or
       pulling. The hook is not safe to use if users  have  interactive	 shell
       access,	as  they  can  then disable the hook. Nor is it safe if remote
       users share an account, because then there is  no  way  to  distinguish
       them.

       The order in which access checks are performed is:

       1. Deny	list for branches (section acl.deny.branches)

       2. Allow list for branches (section acl.allow.branches)

       3. Deny	list for paths	  (section acl.deny)

       4. Allow list for paths	  (section acl.allow)

       The allow and deny sections take key-value pairs.

   Branch-based Access Control
       Use  the	 acl.deny.branches  and	 acl.allow.branches  sections  to have
       branch-based access control. Keys in these sections can be either:

       · a branch name, or

       · an asterisk, to match any branch;

       The corresponding values can be either:

       · a comma-separated list containing users and groups, or

       · an asterisk, to match anyone;

       You can add the "!" prefix to a user or group name to invert the	 sense
       of the match.

   Path-based Access Control
       Use  the acl.deny and acl.allow sections to have path-based access con‐
       trol. Keys in these sections accept a subtree pattern (with a glob syn‐
       tax by default). The corresponding values follow the same syntax as the
       other sections above.

   Groups
       Group names must be prefixed with an @ symbol. Specifying a group  name
       has the same effect as specifying all the users in that group.

       You  can	 define	 group	members in the acl.groups section.  If a group
       name is not defined there, and Mercurial is running under  a  Unix-like
       system,	the  list  of  users will be taken from the OS.	 Otherwise, an
       exception will be raised.

   Example Configuration
       [hooks]

       # Use this if you want to check access restrictions at commit time
       pretxncommit.acl = python:hgext.acl.hook

       # Use this if you want to check access restrictions for pull, push,
       # bundle and serve.
       pretxnchangegroup.acl = python:hgext.acl.hook

       [acl]
       # Allow or deny access for incoming changes only if their source is
       # listed here, let them pass otherwise. Source is "serve" for all
       # remote access (http or ssh), "push", "pull" or "bundle" when the
       # related commands are run locally.
       # Default: serve
       sources = serve

       [acl.deny.branches]

       # Everyone is denied to the frozen branch:
       frozen-branch = *

       # A bad user is denied on all branches:
       * = bad-user

       [acl.allow.branches]

       # A few users are allowed on branch-a:
       branch-a = user-1, user-2, user-3

       # Only one user is allowed on branch-b:
       branch-b = user-1

       # The super user is allowed on any branch:
       * = super-user

       # Everyone is allowed on branch-for-tests:
       branch-for-tests = *

       [acl.deny]
       # This list is checked first. If a match is found, acl.allow is not
       # checked. All users are granted access if acl.deny is not present.
       # Format for both lists: glob pattern = user, ..., @group, ...

       # To match everyone, use an asterisk for the user:
       # my/glob/pattern = *

       # user6 will not have write access to any file:
       ** = user6

       # Group "hg-denied" will not have write access to any file:
       ** = @hg-denied

       # Nobody will be able to change "DONT-TOUCH-THIS.txt", despite
       # everyone being able to change all other files. See below.
       src/main/resources/DONT-TOUCH-THIS.txt = *

       [acl.allow]
       # if acl.allow is not present, all users are allowed by default
       # empty acl.allow = no users allowed

       # User "doc_writer" has write access to any file under the "docs"
       # folder:
       docs/** = doc_writer

       # User "jack" and group "designers" have write access to any file
       # under the "images" folder:
       images/** = jack, @designers

       # Everyone (except for "user6" and "@hg-denied" - see acl.deny above)
       # will have write access to any file under the "resources" folder
       # (except for 1 file. See acl.deny):
       src/main/resources/** = *

       .hgtags = release_engineer

   Examples using the ! prefix
       Suppose there's a branch that only a given user (or  group)  should  be
       able  to	 push  to,  and you don't want to restrict access to any other
       branch that may be created.

       The "!" prefix allows you to prevent anyone  except  a  given  user  or
       group to push changesets in a given branch or path.

       In the examples below, we will: 1) Deny access to branch "ring" to any‐
       one but user "gollum" 2) Deny access to branch  "lake"  to  anyone  but
       members	of  the	 group "hobbit" 3) Deny access to a file to anyone but
       user "gollum"

       [acl.allow.branches]
       # Empty

       [acl.deny.branches]

       # 1) only 'gollum' can commit to branch 'ring';
       # 'gollum' and anyone else can still commit to any other branch.
       ring = !gollum

       # 2) only members of the group 'hobbit' can commit to branch 'lake';
       # 'hobbit' members and anyone else can still commit to any other branch.
       lake = !@hobbit

       # You can also deny access based on file paths:

       [acl.allow]
       # Empty

       [acl.deny]
       # 3) only 'gollum' can change the file below;
       # 'gollum' and anyone else can still change any other file.
       /misty/mountains/cave/ring = !gollum

   amend
       provide the amend command (EXPERIMENTAL)

       This extension provides an amend command	 that  is  similar  to	commit
       --amend but does not prompt an editor.

   Commands
   amend
       amend  the  working  copy  parent  with	all  or	 specified outstanding
       changes:

       hg amend [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Similar to hg commit --amend, but  reuse	 the  commit  message  without
       invoking editor, unless --edit was set.

       See hg help commit for more details.

       Options:

       -A, --addremove
	      mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing

       -e, --edit
	      invoke editor on commit messages

       -i, --interactive
	      use interactive mode

       -n,--note <VALUE>
	      store a note on the amend

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       -m,--message <TEXT>
	      use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
	      read commit message from file

       -d,--date <DATE>
	      record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
	      record the specified user as committer

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   automv
       check for unrecorded moves at commit time (EXPERIMENTAL)

       This  extension	checks	at  commit/amend  time if any of the committed
       files comes from an unrecorded mv.

       The threshold at which a file is considered a move can be set with  the
       automv.similarity config option. This option takes a percentage between
       0 (disabled) and 100 (files must be identical), the default is 95.

   blackbox
       log repository events to a blackbox for debugging

       Logs event information to .hg/blackbox.log to help debug	 and  diagnose
       problems.   The events that get logged can be configured via the black‐
       box.track config key.

       Examples:

       [blackbox]
       track = *
       # dirty is *EXPENSIVE* (slow);
       # each log entry indicates `+` if the repository is dirty, like :hg:`id`.
       dirty = True
       # record the source of log messages
       logsource = True

       [blackbox]
       track = command, commandfinish, commandexception, exthook, pythonhook

       [blackbox]
       track = incoming

       [blackbox]
       # limit the size of a log file
       maxsize = 1.5 MB
       # rotate up to N log files when the current one gets too big
       maxfiles = 3

   Commands
   blackbox
       view the recent repository events:

       hg blackbox [OPTION]...

       view the recent repository events

       Options:

       -l,--limit <VALUE>
	      the number of events to show (default: 10)

   bugzilla
       hooks for integrating with the Bugzilla bug tracker

       This hook extension adds comments on bugs in Bugzilla  when  changesets
       that  refer  to	bugs by Bugzilla ID are seen. The comment is formatted
       using the Mercurial template mechanism.

       The bug references can optionally include an update for Bugzilla of the
       hours spent working on the bug. Bugs can also be marked fixed.

       Four basic modes of access to Bugzilla are provided:

       1. Access via the Bugzilla REST-API. Requires bugzilla 5.0 or later.

       2. Access  via  the Bugzilla XMLRPC interface. Requires Bugzilla 3.4 or
	  later.

       3. Check data via the Bugzilla XMLRPC interface and submit  bug	change
	  via  email  to  Bugzilla  email  interface. Requires Bugzilla 3.4 or
	  later.

       4. Writing directly to the Bugzilla database. Only  Bugzilla  installa‐
	  tions using MySQL are supported. Requires Python MySQLdb.

       Writing	directly to the database is susceptible to schema changes, and
       relies on a Bugzilla contrib script to send out bug change notification
       emails.	This script runs as the user running Mercurial, must be run on
       the host with the Bugzilla install, and	requires  permission  to  read
       Bugzilla	 configuration	details and the necessary MySQL user and pass‐
       word to have full access rights to the  Bugzilla	 database.  For	 these
       reasons	this access mode is now considered deprecated, and will not be
       updated for new Bugzilla versions going forward. Only  adding  comments
       is supported in this access mode.

       Access  via  XMLRPC needs a Bugzilla username and password to be speci‐
       fied in the configuration. Comments  are	 added	under  that  username.
       Since  the configuration must be readable by all Mercurial users, it is
       recommended that the rights of that user are restricted in Bugzilla  to
       the  minimum  necessary	to  add	 comments. Marking bugs fixed requires
       Bugzilla 4.0 and later.

       Access via XMLRPC/email uses XMLRPC to query Bugzilla, but sends	 email
       to  the Bugzilla email interface to submit comments to bugs.  The From:
       address in the email is set to the email address of the Mercurial user,
       so  the	comment	 appears to come from the Mercurial user. In the event
       that the Mercurial user email  is  not  recognized  by  Bugzilla	 as  a
       Bugzilla	 user, the email associated with the Bugzilla username used to
       log into Bugzilla is used instead as the source of the comment. Marking
       bugs fixed works on all supported Bugzilla versions.

       Access  via  the REST-API needs either a Bugzilla username and password
       or an apikey specified in the configuration. Comments  are  made	 under
       the given username or the user associated with the apikey in Bugzilla.

       Configuration items common to all access modes:

       bugzilla.version
	      The access type to use. Values recognized are:

	      restapi

		     Bugzilla REST-API, Bugzilla 5.0 and later.

	      xmlrpc

		     Bugzilla XMLRPC interface.

	      xmlrpc+email

		     Bugzilla XMLRPC and email interfaces.

	      3.0

		     MySQL access, Bugzilla 3.0 and later.

	      2.18

		     MySQL  access,  Bugzilla 2.18 and up to but not including
		     3.0.

	      2.16

		     MySQL access, Bugzilla 2.16 and up to but	not  including
		     2.18.

       bugzilla.regexp
	      Regular expression to match bug IDs for update in changeset com‐
	      mit message.  It must contain one "()" named  group  <ids>  con‐
	      taining  the  bug	 IDs separated by non-digit characters. It may
	      also contain a named group <hours> with a floating-point	number
	      giving  the  hours  worked  on  the  bug. If no named groups are
	      present, the first "()" group is assumed to contain the bug IDs,
	      and work time is not updated. The default expression matches Bug
	      1234, Bug no. 1234, Bug number 1234, Bugs	 1234,5678,  Bug  1234
	      and  5678	 and  variations  thereof, followed by an hours number
	      prefixed by h or hours, e.g. hours 1.5. Matching is case	insen‐
	      sitive.

       bugzilla.fixregexp
	      Regular expression to match bug IDs for marking fixed in change‐
	      set commit message. This must contain a "()" named group	<ids>`
	      containing the bug IDs separated by non-digit characters. It may
	      also contain a named group ``<hours> with a floating-point  num‐
	      ber  giving  the hours worked on the bug. If no named groups are
	      present, the first "()" group is assumed to contain the bug IDs,
	      and  work	 time  is  not updated. The default expression matches
	      Fixes 1234, Fixes bug 1234, Fixes bugs 1234,5678, Fixes 1234 and
	      5678  and	 variations  thereof, followed by an hours number pre‐
	      fixed by h or hours, e.g. hours 1.5. Matching is	case  insensi‐
	      tive.

       bugzilla.fixstatus
	      The status to set a bug to when marking fixed. Default RESOLVED.

       bugzilla.fixresolution
	      The  resolution  to  set	a  bug	to when marking fixed. Default
	      FIXED.

       bugzilla.style
	      The style file to use when formatting comments.

       bugzilla.template
	      Template to use when formatting  comments.  Overrides  style  if
	      specified.  In  addition	to  the	 usual Mercurial keywords, the
	      extension specifies:

	      {bug}

		     The Bugzilla bug ID.

	      {root}

		     The full pathname of the Mercurial repository.

	      {webroot}

		     Stripped pathname of the Mercurial repository.

	      {hgweb}

		     Base URL for browsing Mercurial repositories.

	      Default changeset {node|short} in	 repo  {root}  refers  to  bug
	      {bug}.\ndetails:\n\t{desc|tabindent}

       bugzilla.strip
	      The  number of path separator characters to strip from the front
	      of the Mercurial repository path ({root} in templates)  to  pro‐
	      duce   {webroot}.	  For	example,   a  repository  with	{root}
	      /var/local/my-project with a strip of 2 gives a value for	 {web‐
	      root} of my-project. Default 0.

       web.baseurl
	      Base  URL	 for  browsing Mercurial repositories. Referenced from
	      templates as {hgweb}.

       Configuration items common to XMLRPC+email and MySQL access modes:

       bugzilla.usermap
	      Path of file containing Mercurial committer  email  to  Bugzilla
	      user  email  mappings. If specified, the file should contain one
	      mapping per line:

	      committer = Bugzilla user

	      See also the [usermap] section.

       The [usermap] section is used to specify mappings of Mercurial  commit‐
       ter  email to Bugzilla user email. See also bugzilla.usermap.  Contains
       entries of the form committer = Bugzilla user.

       XMLRPC and REST-API access mode configuration:

       bugzilla.bzurl
	      The  base	 URL   for   the   Bugzilla   installation.    Default
	      http://localhost/bugzilla.

       bugzilla.user
	      The  username  to	 use  to log into Bugzilla via XMLRPC. Default
	      bugs.

       bugzilla.password
	      The password for Bugzilla login.

       REST-API access mode uses the options listed above as well as:

       bugzilla.apikey
	      An apikey generated on the Bugzilla  instance  for  api  access.
	      Using  an apikey removes the need to store the user and password
	      options.

       XMLRPC+email access mode uses  the  XMLRPC  access  mode	 configuration
       items, and also:

       bugzilla.bzemail
	      The Bugzilla email address.

       In  addition,  the Mercurial email settings must be configured. See the
       documentation in hgrc(5), sections [email] and [smtp].

       MySQL access mode configuration:

       bugzilla.host
	      Hostname of the MySQL  server  holding  the  Bugzilla  database.
	      Default localhost.

       bugzilla.db
	      Name of the Bugzilla database in MySQL. Default bugs.

       bugzilla.user
	      Username to use to access MySQL server. Default bugs.

       bugzilla.password
	      Password to use to access MySQL server.

       bugzilla.timeout
	      Database connection timeout (seconds). Default 5.

       bugzilla.bzuser
	      Fallback	Bugzilla user name to record comments with, if change‐
	      set committer cannot be found as a Bugzilla user.

       bugzilla.bzdir
	      Bugzilla install directory.  Used	 by  default  notify.  Default
	      /var/www/html/bugzilla.

       bugzilla.notify
	      The  command to run to get Bugzilla to send bug change notifica‐
	      tion emails. Substitutes from a map with 3 keys, bzdir, id  (bug
	      id) and user (committer bugzilla email). Default depends on ver‐
	      sion; from 2.18 it is "cd %(bzdir)s && perl -T  contrib/sendbug‐
	      mail.pl %(id)s %(user)s".

       Activating the extension:

       [extensions]
       bugzilla =

       [hooks]
       # run bugzilla hook on every change pulled or pushed in here
       incoming.bugzilla = python:hgext.bugzilla.hook

       Example configurations:

       XMLRPC	 example    configuration.   This   uses   the	 Bugzilla   at
       http://my-project.org/bugzilla,	  logging    in	   as	 user	  bug‐
       mail@my-project.org  with  password plugh. It is used with a collection
       of Mercurial repositories in /var/local/hg/repos/, with a web interface
       at http://my-project.org/hg.

       [bugzilla]
       bzurl=http://my-project.org/bugzilla
       user=bugmail@my-project.org
       password=plugh
       version=xmlrpc
       template=Changeset {node|short} in {root|basename}.
		{hgweb}/{webroot}/rev/{node|short}\n
		{desc}\n
       strip=5

       [web]
       baseurl=http://my-project.org/hg

       XMLRPC+email   example	configuration.	 This  uses  the  Bugzilla  at
       http://my-project.org/bugzilla,	  logging    in	   as	 user	  bug‐
       mail@my-project.org  with  password plugh. It is used with a collection
       of Mercurial repositories in /var/local/hg/repos/, with a web interface
       at  http://my-project.org/hg.  Bug  comments  are  sent to the Bugzilla
       email address bugzilla@my-project.org.

       [bugzilla]
       bzurl=http://my-project.org/bugzilla
       user=bugmail@my-project.org
       password=plugh
       version=xmlrpc+email
       bzemail=bugzilla@my-project.org
       template=Changeset {node|short} in {root|basename}.
		{hgweb}/{webroot}/rev/{node|short}\n
		{desc}\n
       strip=5

       [web]
       baseurl=http://my-project.org/hg

       [usermap]
       user@emaildomain.com=user.name@bugzilladomain.com

       MySQL example configuration. This has a local Bugzilla 3.2 installation
       in  /opt/bugzilla-3.2. The MySQL database is on localhost, the Bugzilla
       database name is bugs and MySQL is accessed with	 MySQL	username  bugs
       password	 XYZZY. It is used with a collection of Mercurial repositories
       in    /var/local/hg/repos/,     with	a     web     interface	    at
       http://my-project.org/hg.

       [bugzilla]
       host=localhost
       password=XYZZY
       version=3.0
       bzuser=unknown@domain.com
       bzdir=/opt/bugzilla-3.2
       template=Changeset {node|short} in {root|basename}.
		{hgweb}/{webroot}/rev/{node|short}\n
		{desc}\n
       strip=5

       [web]
       baseurl=http://my-project.org/hg

       [usermap]
       user@emaildomain.com=user.name@bugzilladomain.com

       All the above add a comment to the Bugzilla bug record of the form:

       Changeset 3b16791d6642 in repository-name.
       http://my-project.org/hg/repository-name/rev/3b16791d6642

       Changeset commit comment. Bug 1234.

   censor
       erase file content at a given revision

       The  censor  command instructs Mercurial to erase all content of a file
       at a given revision without updating the changeset  hash.  This	allows
       existing	 history  to remain valid while preventing future clones/pulls
       from receiving the erased data.

       Typical uses for censor are due	to  security  or  legal	 requirements,
       including:

       * Passwords, private keys, cryptographic material
       * Licensed data/code/libraries for which the license has expired
       * Personally Identifiable Information or other private data

       Censored nodes can interrupt mercurial's typical operation whenever the
       excised data needs to be materialized. Some commands,  like  hg	cat/hg
       revert,	simply	fail when asked to produce censored data. Others, like
       hg verify and hg update, must be capable of tolerating censored data to
       continue	 to  function in a meaningful way. Such commands only tolerate
       censored file  revisions	 if  they  are	allowed	 by  the  "censor.pol‐
       icy=ignore" config option.

   Commands
   censor
       hg censor -r REV [-t TEXT] [FILE]

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV>
	      censor file from specified revision

       -t,--tombstone <TEXT>
	      replacement tombstone data

   children
       command to display child changesets (DEPRECATED)

       This  extension is deprecated. You should use hg log -r "children(REV)"
       instead.

   Commands
   children
       show the children of the given or working directory revision:

       hg children [-r REV] [FILE]

       Print the children of the working directory's revisions. If a  revision
       is  given  via -r/--rev, the children of that revision will be printed.
       If a file argument is given,  revision  in  which  the  file  was  last
       changed	(after the working directory revision or the argument to --rev
       if given) is printed.

       Please use hg log instead:

       hg children => hg log -r "children(.)"
       hg children -r REV => hg log -r "children(REV)"

       See hg help log and hg help revsets.children.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV>
	      show children of the specified revision

       --style <STYLE>
	      display using template map file (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template

   churn
       command to display statistics about repository history

   Commands
   churn
       histogram of changes to the repository:

       hg churn [-d DATE] [-r REV] [--aliases FILE] [FILE]

       This command will  display  a  histogram	 representing  the  number  of
       changed	lines  or  revisions, grouped according to the given template.
       The default template will group changes by  author.   The  --dateformat
       option may be used to group the results by date instead.

       Statistics  are	based on the number of changed lines, or alternatively
       the number of matching revisions if the --changesets option  is	speci‐
       fied.

       Examples:

       # display count of changed lines for every committer
       hg churn -T "{author|email}"

       # display daily activity graph
       hg churn -f "%H" -s -c

       # display activity of developers by month
       hg churn -f "%Y-%m" -s -c

       # display count of lines changed in every year
       hg churn -f "%Y" -s

       It  is  possible	 to map alternate email addresses to a main address by
       providing a file using the following format:

       <alias email> = <actual email>

       Such a file may be specified with the  --aliases	 option,  otherwise  a
       .hgchurn	 file  will  be	 looked	 for  in  the  working directory root.
       Aliases will be split from the rightmost "=".

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      count rate for the specified revision or revset

       -d,--date <DATE>
	      count rate for revisions matching date spec

       -t,--oldtemplate <TEMPLATE>
	      template to group changesets (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      template to group changesets (default: {author|email})

       -f,--dateformat <FORMAT>
	      strftime-compatible format for grouping by date

       -c, --changesets
	      count rate by number of changesets

       -s, --sort
	      sort by key (default: sort by count)

       --diffstat
	      display added/removed lines separately

       --aliases <FILE>
	      file with email aliases

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   clonebundles
       advertise pre-generated bundles to seed clones

       "clonebundles" is a server-side extension used to advertise  the	 exis‐
       tence  of pre-generated, externally hosted bundle files to clients that
       are cloning so that cloning can be faster, more reliable,  and  require
       less resources on the server.

       Cloning can be a CPU and I/O intensive operation on servers. Tradition‐
       ally, the server, in response to a client's request to  clone,  dynami‐
       cally  generates	 a bundle containing the entire repository content and
       sends it to the client.	There is no caching  on	 the  server  and  the
       server  will  have  to redundantly generate the same outgoing bundle in
       response to each clone request. For servers with large repositories  or
       with  high  clone  volume,  the	load  from clones can make scaling the
       server challenging and costly.

       This extension provides server operators the ability to offload	poten‐
       tially  expensive  clone	 load  to  an  external service. Here's how it
       works.

       1. A server operator establishes a mechanism for	 making	 bundle	 files
	  available  on	 a  hosting  service where Mercurial clients can fetch
	  them.

       2. A manifest file listing available  bundle  URLs  and	some  optional
	  metadata is added to the Mercurial repository on the server.

       3. A client initiates a clone against a clone bundles aware server.

       4. The  client sees the server is advertising clone bundles and fetches
	  the manifest listing available bundles.

       5. The client filters and sorts the available bundles based on what  it
	  supports and prefers.

       6. The  client  downloads  and  applies	an  available  bundle from the
	  server-specified URL.

       7. The client reconnects to the original server and performs the equiv‐
	  alent	 of hg pull to retrieve all repository data not in the bundle.
	  (The repository could have been updated between when the bundle  was
	  created and when the client started the clone.)

       Instead	of  the	 server	 generating  full repository bundles for every
       clone request, it generates full bundles once and they are subsequently
       reused  to  bootstrap new clones. The server may still transfer data at
       clone time.  However, this is only data	that  has  been	 added/changed
       since the bundle was created. For large, established repositories, this
       can reduce server load for clones to less than 1% of original.

       To work, this extension requires the following of server operators:

       · Generating bundle files of  repository	 content  (typically  periodi‐
	 cally, such as once per day).

       · A  file  server  that	clients have network access to and that Python
	 knows how to talk to through its normal URL handling facility	(typi‐
	 cally an HTTP server).

       · A  process  for  keeping  the bundles manifest in sync with available
	 bundle files.

       Strictly speaking, using a static file hosting server isn't required: a
       server operator could use a dynamic service for retrieving bundle data.
       However, static file hosting  services  are  simple  and	 scalable  and
       should be sufficient for most needs.

       Bundle  files can be generated with the hg bundle command. Typically hg
       bundle --all is used to produce a bundle of the entire repository.

       hg  debugcreatestreamclonebundle can  be	 used  to  produce  a  special
       streaming clone bundle. These are bundle files that are extremely effi‐
       cient to produce and consume (read: fast).  However,  they  are	larger
       than  traditional  bundle  formats and require that clients support the
       exact set of repository data store formats in  use  by  the  repository
       that  created  them.   Typically, a newer server can serve data that is
       compatible with older clients.  However, streaming clone bundles	 don't
       have  this guarantee. Server operators need to be aware that newer ver‐
       sions of Mercurial may produce  streaming  clone	 bundles  incompatible
       with older Mercurial versions.

       A  server operator is responsible for creating a .hg/clonebundles.mani‐
       fest file containing the list of available bundle  files	 suitable  for
       seeding	clones.	 If  this file does not exist, the repository will not
       advertise the existence of clone bundles when clients connect.

       The manifest file contains a newline (n) delimited list of entries.

       Each line in this file defines an available bundle. Lines have the for‐
       mat:

	  <URL> [<key>=<value>[ <key>=<value>]]

       That  is,  a  URL  followed  by	an  optional,  space-delimited list of
       key=value pairs describing additional properties of this	 bundle.  Both
       keys and values are URI encoded.

       Keys  in	 UPPERCASE  are	 reserved for use by Mercurial and are defined
       below.  All non-uppercase keys can be used by  site  installations.  An
       example use for custom properties is to use the datacenter attribute to
       define which data center a file is hosted in. Clients could then prefer
       a server in the data center closest to them.

       The following reserved keys are currently defined:

       BUNDLESPEC
	      A	 "bundle  specification" string that describes the type of the
	      bundle.

	      These are string values that are accepted by the "--type"	 argu‐
	      ment of hg bundle.

	      The  values  are parsed in strict mode, which means they must be
	      of    the	   "<compression>-<type>"     form.	See	mercu‐
	      rial.exchange.parsebundlespec() for more details.

	      hg debugbundle --spec can be used to print the bundle specifica‐
	      tion string for a bundle file. The output of this command can be
	      used  verbatim  for  the	value  of  BUNDLESPEC  (it  is already
	      escaped).

	      Clients will automatically filter out  specifications  that  are
	      unknown  or  unsupported so they won't attempt to download some‐
	      thing that likely won't apply.

	      The actual value doesn't impact client behavior  beyond  filter‐
	      ing: clients will still sniff the bundle type from the header of
	      downloaded files.

	      Use of this key is highly recommended, as it allows  clients  to
	      easily  skip unsupported bundles. If this key is not defined, an
	      old client may attempt to apply a bundle that it is incapable of
	      reading.

       REQUIRESNI
	      Whether  Server  Name Indication (SNI) is required to connect to
	      the URL.	SNI allows servers to use multiple certificates on the
	      same  IP.	 It  is	 somewhat  common  in  CDNs  and other hosting
	      providers. Older Python versions do not  support	SNI.  Defining
	      this  attribute  enables	clients	 with older Python versions to
	      filter this entry without experiencing an opaque SSL failure  at
	      connection time.

	      If this is defined, it is important to advertise a non-SNI fall‐
	      back URL or clients running old Python releases may not be  able
	      to clone with the clonebundles facility.

	      Value should be "true".

       Manifests  can  contain multiple entries. Assuming metadata is defined,
       clients will filter entries from the manifest that they don't  support.
       The  remaining  entries	are  optionally	 sorted	 by client preferences
       (ui.clonebundleprefers config option).  The  client  then  attempts  to
       fetch the bundle at the first URL in the remaining list.

       Errors  when downloading a bundle will fail the entire clone operation:
       clients do not automatically fall back to a traditional clone. The rea‐
       son for this is that if a server is using clone bundles, it is probably
       doing so because the feature is necessary to help it  scale.  In	 other
       words,  there  is  an  assumption  that clone load will be offloaded to
       another service and that the Mercurial  server  isn't  responsible  for
       serving	this clone load.  If that other service experiences issues and
       clients start mass falling back to the original Mercurial  server,  the
       added  clone load could overwhelm the server due to unexpected load and
       effectively take it offline. Not having clients automatically fall back
       to cloning from the original server mitigates this scenario.

       Because	there  is no automatic Mercurial server fallback on failure of
       the bundle hosting service, it is important  for	 server	 operators  to
       view the bundle hosting service as an extension of the Mercurial server
       in terms of availability and service level agreements:  if  the	bundle
       hosting	service	 goes  down, so does the ability for clients to clone.
       Note: clients will see a message informing them how to bypass the clone
       bundles facility when a failure occurs. So server operators should pre‐
       pare for some people  to	 follow	 these	instructions  when  a  failure
       occurs,	thus  driving  more load to the original Mercurial server when
       the bundle hosting service fails.

   commitextras
       adds a new flag extras to commit (ADVANCED)

   convert
       import revisions from foreign VCS repositories into Mercurial

   Commands
   convert
       convert a foreign SCM repository to a Mercurial one.:

       hg convert [OPTION]... SOURCE [DEST [REVMAP]]

       Accepted source formats [identifiers]:

       · Mercurial [hg]

       · CVS [cvs]

       · Darcs [darcs]

       · git [git]

       · Subversion [svn]

       · Monotone [mtn]

       · GNU Arch [gnuarch]

       · Bazaar [bzr]

       · Perforce [p4]

       Accepted destination formats [identifiers]:

       · Mercurial [hg]

       · Subversion [svn] (history on branches is not preserved)

       If no revision is given, all revisions will be  converted.   Otherwise,
       convert	will  only  import up to the named revision (given in a format
       understood by the source).

       If no destination directory name is specified, it defaults to the base‐
       name  of	 the  source  with -hg appended. If the destination repository
       doesn't exist, it will be created.

       By default, all sources except Mercurial will use --branchsort.	Mercu‐
       rial  uses  --sourcesort	 to  preserve original revision numbers order.
       Sort modes have the following effects:

       --branchsort
	      convert from parent to child revision when possible, which means
	      branches are usually converted one after the other. It generates
	      more compact repositories.

       --datesort
	      sort revisions by date. Converted repositories have good-looking
	      changelogs  but  are often an order of magnitude larger than the
	      same ones generated by --branchsort.

       --sourcesort
	      try to preserve source revisions order, only supported by Mercu‐
	      rial sources.

       --closesort
	      try  to  move  closed  revisions	as close as possible to parent
	      branches, only supported by Mercurial sources.

       If  REVMAP  isn't  given,  it  will  be	put  in	 a  default   location
       (<dest>/.hg/shamap  by  default). The REVMAP is a simple text file that
       maps each source commit ID to the destination  ID  for  that  revision,
       like so:

       <source ID> <destination ID>

       If  the file doesn't exist, it's automatically created. It's updated on
       each commit copied, so hg convert can be interrupted  and  can  be  run
       repeatedly to copy new commits.

       The authormap is a simple text file that maps each source commit author
       to a destination commit author. It is handy for source  SCMs  that  use
       unix  logins  to identify authors (e.g.: CVS). One line per author map‐
       ping and the line format is:

       source author = destination author

       Empty lines and lines starting with a # are ignored.

       The filemap is a file that allows filtering and remapping of files  and
       directories. Each line can contain one of the following directives:

       include path/to/file-or-dir

       exclude path/to/file-or-dir

       rename path/to/source path/to/destination

       Comment	lines  start with #. A specified path matches if it equals the
       full relative name of a file or one  of	its  parent  directories.  The
       include or exclude directive with the longest matching path applies, so
       line order does not matter.

       The include directive causes a file, or all files under a directory, to
       be  included in the destination repository. The default if there are no
       include statements is to include everything.  If there are any  include
       statements,  nothing  else  is  included.  The exclude directive causes
       files or directories to be omitted. The rename directive renames a file
       or directory if it is converted. To rename from a subdirectory into the
       root of the repository, use . as the path to rename to.

       --full will make sure the  converted  changesets	 contain  exactly  the
       right  files  with the right content. It will make a full conversion of
       all files, not just the ones that have changed. Files that already  are
       correct	will not be changed. This can be used to apply filemap changes
       when converting incrementally. This is  currently  only	supported  for
       Mercurial and Subversion.

       The  splicemap  is  a  file that allows insertion of synthetic history,
       letting you specify the parents of a revision. This is  useful  if  you
       want  to e.g. give a Subversion merge two parents, or graft two discon‐
       nected series of history together. Each entry contains a key,  followed
       by a space, followed by one or two comma-separated values:

       key parent1, parent2

       The  key is the revision ID in the source revision control system whose
       parents should be modified (same format as a key	 in  .hg/shamap).  The
       values  are the revision IDs (in either the source or destination revi‐
       sion control system) that should be used as the new  parents  for  that
       node.  For example, if you have merged "release-1.0" into "trunk", then
       you should specify the revision on "trunk" as the first parent and  the
       one on the "release-1.0" branch as the second.

       The  branchmap  is a file that allows you to rename a branch when it is
       being brought in from whatever external repository. When used  in  con‐
       junction with a splicemap, it allows for a powerful combination to help
       fix even the most badly mismanaged  repositories	 and  turn  them  into
       nicely  structured Mercurial repositories. The branchmap contains lines
       of the form:

       original_branch_name new_branch_name

       where "original_branch_name" is the name of the branch  in  the	source
       repository, and "new_branch_name" is the name of the branch is the des‐
       tination repository. No whitespace is allowed in the new	 branch	 name.
       This  can  be  used  to (for instance) move code in one repository from
       "default" to a named branch.

   Mercurial Source
       The Mercurial source recognizes the  following  configuration  options,
       which you can set on the command line with --config:

       convert.hg.ignoreerrors
	      ignore  integrity	 errors when reading.  Use it to fix Mercurial
	      repositories with missing revlogs, by  converting	 from  and  to
	      Mercurial. Default is False.

       convert.hg.saverev
	      store  original  revision	 ID in changeset (forces target IDs to
	      change). It takes a boolean argument and defaults to False.

       convert.hg.startrev
	      specify the initial Mercurial revision.  The default is 0.

       convert.hg.revs
	      revset specifying the source revisions to convert.

   CVS Source
       CVS source will use a sandbox (i.e. a checked-out  copy)	 from  CVS  to
       indicate the starting point of what will be converted. Direct access to
       the repository files is not needed, unless of course the repository  is
       :local:.	 The conversion uses the top level directory in the sandbox to
       find the CVS repository, and then uses CVS rlog commands to find	 files
       to  convert. This means that unless a filemap is given, all files under
       the starting directory will be converted, and that any directory	 reor‐
       ganization in the CVS sandbox is ignored.

       The following options can be used with --config:

       convert.cvsps.cache
	      Set  to  False  to  disable  remote log caching, for testing and
	      debugging purposes. Default is True.

       convert.cvsps.fuzz
	      Specify the maximum time (in seconds) that  is  allowed  between
	      commits  with identical user and log message in a single change‐
	      set. When very large files were checked in as part of a  change‐
	      set then the default may not be long enough.  The default is 60.

       convert.cvsps.logencoding
	      Specify  encoding	 name  to be used for transcoding CVS log mes‐
	      sages. Multiple encoding names can be specified as a  list  (see
	      hg  help	config.Syntax), but only the first acceptable encoding
	      in the list is used per CVS log  entries.	 This  transcoding  is
	      executed before cvslog hook below.

       convert.cvsps.mergeto
	      Specify  a  regular  expression to which commit log messages are
	      matched. If a match occurs, then	the  conversion	 process  will
	      insert  a	 dummy	revision  merging the branch on which this log
	      message occurs to the branch indicated in the regex. Default  is
	      {{mergetobranch ([-\w]+)}}

       convert.cvsps.mergefrom
	      Specify  a  regular  expression to which commit log messages are
	      matched. If a match occurs, then the conversion process will add
	      the most recent revision on the branch indicated in the regex as
	      the second parent of the changeset. Default is {{mergefrombranch
	      ([-\w]+)}}

       convert.localtimezone
	      use  local  time	(as determined by the TZ environment variable)
	      for changeset date/times. The default is False (use UTC).

       hooks.cvslog
	      Specify a Python function to be called at the end	 of  gathering
	      the CVS log. The function is passed a list with the log entries,
	      and can modify the entries in-place, or add or delete them.

       hooks.cvschangesets
	      Specify a Python function to be called after the changesets  are
	      calculated  from the CVS log. The function is passed a list with
	      the changeset entries, and can modify the	 changesets  in-place,
	      or add or delete them.

       An additional "debugcvsps" Mercurial command allows the builtin change‐
       set merging code to be run without doing a conversion.  Its  parameters
       and  output  are	 similar  to that of cvsps 2.1. Please see the command
       help for more details.

   Subversion Source
       Subversion source detects classical  trunk/branches/tags	 layouts.   By
       default,	 the  supplied	svn://repo/path/  source URL is converted as a
       single branch. If svn://repo/path/trunk exists it replaces the  default
       branch.	If  svn://repo/path/branches  exists,  its  subdirectories are
       listed as possible branches.  If	 svn://repo/path/tags  exists,	it  is
       looked for tags referencing converted branches. Default trunk, branches
       and tags values can be overridden with following options. Set  them  to
       paths  relative	to the source URL, or leave them blank to disable auto
       detection.

       The following options can be set with --config:

       convert.svn.branches
	      specify the  directory  containing  branches.   The  default  is
	      branches.

       convert.svn.tags
	      specify the directory containing tags. The default is tags.

       convert.svn.trunk
	      specify the name of the trunk branch. The default is trunk.

       convert.localtimezone
	      use  local  time	(as determined by the TZ environment variable)
	      for changeset date/times. The default is False (use UTC).

       Source history can  be  retrieved  starting  at	a  specific  revision,
       instead	of  being integrally converted. Only single branch conversions
       are supported.

       convert.svn.startrev
	      specify start Subversion revision number.	 The default is 0.

   Git Source
       The Git importer converts commits from all reachable branches (refs  in
       refs/heads)  and remotes (refs in refs/remotes) to Mercurial.  Branches
       are converted to	 bookmarks  with  the  same  name,  with  the  leading
       'refs/heads'  stripped. Git submodules are converted to Git subrepos in
       Mercurial.

       The following options can be set with --config:

       convert.git.similarity
	      specify how similar files modified in a commit  must  be	to  be
	      imported	as  renames or copies, as a percentage between 0 (dis‐
	      abled) and 100 (files must be identical). For example, 90	 means
	      that a delete/add pair will be imported as a rename if more than
	      90% of the file hasn't changed. The default is 50.

       convert.git.findcopiesharder
	      while detecting copies, look at all files in  the	 working  copy
	      instead  of  just changed ones. This is very expensive for large
	      projects, and is only effective when  convert.git.similarity  is
	      greater than 0. The default is False.

       convert.git.renamelimit
	      perform  rename and copy detection up to this many changed files
	      in a commit. Increasing this will make rename and copy detection
	      more  accurate  but  will significantly slow down computation on
	      large projects. The option is only relevant if convert.git.simi‐
	      larity is greater than 0. The default is 400.

       convert.git.committeractions
	      list  of	actions	 to  take when processing author and committer
	      values.

	      Git commits have separate author (who wrote the commit) and com‐
	      mitter  (who  applied  the  commit) fields. Not all destinations
	      support separate author and committer fields  (including	Mercu‐
	      rial).  This config option controls what to do with these author
	      and committer fields during conversion.

	      A value of messagedifferent will append a committer:  ...	  line
	      to the commit message if the Git committer is different from the
	      author. The prefix of that line can be specified using the  syn‐
	      tax messagedifferent=<prefix>. e.g. messagedifferent=git-commit‐
	      ter:.  When a prefix  is	specified,  a  space  will  always  be
	      inserted between the prefix and the value.

	      messagealways  behaves  like  messagedifferent  except  it  will
	      always result in a committer: ... line  being  appended  to  the
	      commit  message. This value is mutually exclusive with messaged‐
	      ifferent.

	      dropcommitter will remove references to the committer. Only ref‐
	      erences  to  the author will remain. Actions that add references
	      to the committer will have no effect when this is set.

	      replaceauthor will replace the value of the  author  field  with
	      the  committer. Other actions that add references to the commit‐
	      ter will still take effect when this is set.

	      The default is messagedifferent.

       convert.git.extrakeys
	      list of extra keys from commit metadata to copy to the  destina‐
	      tion. Some Git repositories store extra metadata in commits.  By
	      default, this non-default metadata will be lost  during  conver‐
	      sion.  Setting this config option can retain that metadata. Some
	      built-in keys such as parent and branch are not  allowed	to  be
	      copied.

       convert.git.remoteprefix
	      remote	refs	are   converted	  as   bookmarks   with	  con‐
	      vert.git.remoteprefix as a prefix followed by a /.  The  default
	      is 'remote'.

       convert.git.saverev
	      whether  to  store the original Git commit ID in the metadata of
	      the destination commit. The default is True.

       convert.git.skipsubmodules
	      does not convert root level  .gitmodules	files  or  files  with
	      160000 mode indicating a submodule. Default is False.

   Perforce Source
       The  Perforce  (P4)  importer  can be given a p4 depot path or a client
       specification as source. It will convert all files in the source	 to  a
       flat  Mercurial repository, ignoring labels, branches and integrations.
       Note that when a depot path is given you then usually should specify  a
       target directory, because otherwise the target may be named ...-hg.

       The following options can be set with --config:

       convert.p4.encoding
	      specify the encoding to use when decoding standard output of the
	      Perforce command line tool. The default is default system encod‐
	      ing.

       convert.p4.startrev
	      specify  initial	Perforce  revision (a Perforce changelist num‐
	      ber).

   Mercurial Destination
       The Mercurial destination will recognize Mercurial  subrepositories  in
       the  destination	 directory,  and update the .hgsubstate file automati‐
       cally	if    the    destination    subrepositories    contain	   the
       <dest>/<sub>/.hg/shamap	file.  Converting a repository with subreposi‐
       tories requires converting a single repository at a time, from the bot‐
       tom up.

       An example showing how to convert a repository with subrepositories:

       # so convert knows the type when it sees a non empty destination
       $ hg init converted

       $ hg convert orig/sub1 converted/sub1
       $ hg convert orig/sub2 converted/sub2
       $ hg convert orig converted

       The following options are supported:

       convert.hg.clonebranches
	      dispatch	source	branches  in  separate	clones. The default is
	      False.

       convert.hg.tagsbranch
	      branch name for tag revisions, defaults to default.

       convert.hg.usebranchnames
	      preserve branch names. The default is True.

       convert.hg.sourcename
	      records the given string as a 'convert_source'  extra  value  on
	      each commit made in the target repository. The default is None.

   All Destinations
       All destination types accept the following options:

       convert.skiptags
	      does  not	 convert tags from the source repo to the target repo.
	      The default is False.

       Options:

       --authors <FILE>
	      username mapping filename (DEPRECATED) (use --authormap instead)

       -s,--source-type <TYPE>
	      source repository type

       -d,--dest-type <TYPE>
	      destination repository type

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      import up to source revision REV

       -A,--authormap <FILE>
	      remap usernames using this file

       --filemap <FILE>
	      remap file names using contents of file

       --full apply filemap changes by converting all files again

       --splicemap <FILE>
	      splice synthesized history into place

       --branchmap <FILE>
	      change branch names while converting

       --branchsort
	      try to sort changesets by branches

       --datesort
	      try to sort changesets by date

       --sourcesort
	      preserve source changesets order

       --closesort
	      try to reorder closed revisions

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   eol
       automatically manage newlines in repository files

       This extension allows you to manage the type of line endings  (CRLF  or
       LF) that are used in the repository and in the local working directory.
       That way you can get CRLF line endings on Windows and LF	 on  Unix/Mac,
       thereby letting everybody use their OS native line endings.

       The  extension reads its configuration from a versioned .hgeol configu‐
       ration file found in the root of the working directory. The .hgeol file
       use the same syntax as all other Mercurial configuration files. It uses
       two sections, [patterns] and [repository].

       The [patterns] section specifies how line endings should	 be  converted
       between	the working directory and the repository. The format is speci‐
       fied by a file pattern. The first match is used, so put	more  specific
       patterns first. The available line endings are LF, CRLF, and BIN.

       Files with the declared format of CRLF or LF are always checked out and
       stored in the repository in that format and files declared to be binary
       (BIN) are left unchanged. Additionally, native is an alias for checking
       out in the platform's default line ending: LF on Unix (including Mac OS
       X)  and	CRLF on Windows. Note that BIN (do nothing to line endings) is
       Mercurial's default behavior; it is only needed if you need to override
       a later, more general pattern.

       The optional [repository] section specifies the line endings to use for
       files stored in the repository. It has a single setting, native,	 which
       determines the storage line endings for files declared as native in the
       [patterns] section. It can be set to LF or CRLF. The default is LF. For
       example,	 this  means that on Windows, files configured as native (CRLF
       by default) will be converted to LF  when  stored  in  the  repository.
       Files declared as LF, CRLF, or BIN in the [patterns] section are always
       stored as-is in the repository.

       Example versioned .hgeol file:

       [patterns]
       **.py = native
       **.vcproj = CRLF
       **.txt = native
       Makefile = LF
       **.jpg = BIN

       [repository]
       native = LF

       Note   The rules will first apply when files are touched in the working
	      directory, e.g. by updating to null and back to tip to touch all
	      files.

       The extension uses an optional [eol] section read from both the	normal
       Mercurial  configuration	 files	and  the  .hgeol file, with the latter
       overriding the former. You can use that section to control the  overall
       behavior. There are three settings:

       · eol.native  (default os.linesep) can be set to LF or CRLF to override
	 the default interpretation of native for checkout. This can  be  used
	 with hg archive on Unix, say, to generate an archive where files have
	 line endings for Windows.

       · eol.only-consistent (default True) can be set to False	 to  make  the
	 extension  convert  files  with inconsistent EOLs. Inconsistent means
	 that there is both CRLF and LF present in the file.  Such  files  are
	 normally  not	touched under the assumption that they have mixed EOLs
	 on purpose.

       · eol.fix-trailing-newline (default False) can be set to True to ensure
	 that  converted  files end with a EOL character (either \n or \r\n as
	 per the configured patterns).

       The extension provides cleverencode: and cleverdecode: filters like the
       deprecated  win32text  extension	 does. This means that you can disable
       win32text and enable eol and your filters will  still  work.  You  only
       need to these filters until you have prepared a .hgeol file.

       The  win32text.forbid*  hooks  provided by the win32text extension have
       been unified into a single hook named eol.checkheadshook. The hook will
       lookup  the expected line endings from the .hgeol file, which means you
       must migrate to a .hgeol file first before using the  hook.  eol.check‐
       headshook  only	checks	heads,	intermediate invalid revisions will be
       pushed. To forbid them completely, use the eol.checkallhook hook. These
       hooks are best used as pretxnchangegroup hooks.

       See hg help patterns for more information about the glob patterns used.

   extdiff
       command to allow external programs to compare revisions

       The  extdiff Mercurial extension allows you to use external programs to
       compare revisions, or revision with  working  directory.	 The  external
       diff  programs  are  called  with a configurable set of options and two
       non-option arguments: paths  to	directories  containing	 snapshots  of
       files to compare.

       The  extdiff  extension also allows you to configure new diff commands,
       so you do not need to type hg extdiff -p kdiff3 always.

       [extdiff]
       # add new command that runs GNU diff(1) in 'context diff' mode
       cdiff = gdiff -Nprc5
       ## or the old way:
       #cmd.cdiff = gdiff
       #opts.cdiff = -Nprc5

       # add new command called meld, runs meld (no need to name twice).  If
       # the meld executable is not available, the meld tool in [merge-tools]
       # will be used, if available
       meld =

       # add new command called vimdiff, runs gvimdiff with DirDiff plugin
       # (see http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=102) Non
       # English user, be sure to put "let g:DirDiffDynamicDiffText = 1" in
       # your .vimrc
       vimdiff = gvim -f "+next" \
		 "+execute 'DirDiff' fnameescape(argv(0)) fnameescape(argv(1))"

       Tool arguments can include variables that are expanded at runtime:

       $parent1, $plabel1 - filename, descriptive label of first parent
       $child,	 $clabel  - filename, descriptive label of child revision
       $parent2, $plabel2 - filename, descriptive label of second parent
       $root		  - repository root
       $parent is an alias for $parent1.

       The extdiff extension will look in your [diff-tools] and	 [merge-tools]
       sections for diff tool arguments, when none are specified in [extdiff].

       [extdiff]
       kdiff3 =

       [diff-tools]
       kdiff3.diffargs=--L1 '$plabel1' --L2 '$clabel' $parent $child

       You  can	 use  -I/-X and list of file or directory names like normal hg
       diff command. The extdiff extension  makes  snapshots  of  only	needed
       files,  so  running  the	 external diff program will actually be pretty
       fast (at least faster than having to compare the entire tree).

   Commands
   extdiff
       use external program to diff repository (or selected files):

       hg extdiff [OPT]... [FILE]...

       Show differences between revisions for the specified  files,  using  an
       external	 program.  The	default	 program  used	is  diff, with default
       options "-Npru".

       To select a different program, use the -p/--program option. The program
       will  be	 passed the names of two directories to compare. To pass addi‐
       tional options to the program, use -o/--option. These  will  be	passed
       before the names of the directories to compare.

       When  two  revision arguments are given, then changes are shown between
       those revisions. If only one revision is specified then	that  revision
       is compared to the working directory, and, when no revisions are speci‐
       fied, the working directory files are compared to its parent.

       Options:

       -p,--program <CMD>
	      comparison program to run

       -o,--option <OPT[+]>
	      pass option to comparison program

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      revision

       -c,--change <REV>
	      change made by revision

       --patch
	      compare patches for two revisions

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       -S, --subrepos
	      recurse into subrepositories

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   factotum
       http authentication with factotum

       This extension allows the factotum(4) facility on Plan 9 from Bell Labs
       platforms  to  provide authentication information for HTTP access. Con‐
       figuration entries specified in the auth section as well as authentica‐
       tion information provided in the repository URL are fully supported. If
       no prefix is specified, a value of "*" will be assumed.

       By default, keys are specified as:

       proto=pass service=hg prefix=<prefix> user=<username> !password=<password>

       If the factotum extension is unable to read the required key, one  will
       be requested interactively.

       A  configuration section is available to customize runtime behavior. By
       default, these entries are:

       [factotum]
       executable = /bin/auth/factotum
       mountpoint = /mnt/factotum
       service = hg

       The executable entry defines the full path to the factotum binary.  The
       mountpoint entry defines the path to the factotum file service. Lastly,
       the service entry controls the service name used when reading keys.

   fetch
       pull, update and merge in one command (DEPRECATED)

   Commands
   fetch
       pull changes from a remote repository, merge new changes if needed.:

       hg fetch [SOURCE]

       This finds all changes from the repository at the specified path or URL
       and adds them to the local repository.

       If  the pulled changes add a new branch head, the head is automatically
       merged, and the result of the merge is committed.  Otherwise, the work‐
       ing directory is updated to include the new changes.

       When  a	merge is needed, the working directory is first updated to the
       newly pulled changes. Local changes are then  merged  into  the	pulled
       changes. To switch the merge order, use --switch-parent.

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      a specific revision you would like to pull

       --edit invoke editor on commit messages

       --force-editor
	      edit commit message (DEPRECATED)

       --switch-parent
	      switch parents when merging

       -m,--message <TEXT>
	      use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
	      read commit message from file

       -d,--date <DATE>
	      record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
	      record the specified user as committer

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
	      specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
	      specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
	      do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   fsmonitor
       Faster status operations with the Watchman file monitor (EXPERIMENTAL)

       Integrates the file-watching program Watchman with Mercurial to produce
       faster status results.

       On a particular Linux system, for a  real-world	repository  with  over
       400,000	files  hosted on ext4, vanilla hg status takes 1.3 seconds. On
       the same system, with fsmonitor it takes about 0.3 seconds.

       fsmonitor requires no configuration -- it will tell Watchman about your
       repository   as	 necessary.  You'll  need  to  install	Watchman  from
       https://facebook.github.io/watchman/ and make sure it is in your PATH.

       fsmonitor is incompatible with the largefiles and eol  extensions,  and
       will disable itself if any of those are active.

       The following configuration options exist:

       [fsmonitor]
       mode = {off, on, paranoid}

       When  mode = off, fsmonitor will disable itself (similar to not loading
       the extension at all). When mode = on, fsmonitor will be	 enabled  (the
       default).  When mode = paranoid, fsmonitor will query both Watchman and
       the filesystem, and ensure that the results are consistent.

       [fsmonitor]
       timeout = (float)

       A value, in seconds, that determines how long fsmonitor will  wait  for
       Watchman to return results. Defaults to 2.0.

       [fsmonitor]
       blacklistusers = (list of userids)

       A list of usernames for which fsmonitor will disable itself altogether.

       [fsmonitor]
       walk_on_invalidate = (boolean)

       Whether	or  not to walk the whole repo ourselves when our cached state
       has been invalidated, for example when Watchman has been	 restarted  or
       .hgignore  rules	 have  been changed. Walking the repo in that case can
       result in competing for I/O with Watchman. For large repos it is recom‐
       mended  to set this value to false. You may wish to set this to true if
       you have a very fast filesystem that can outpace the  IPC  overhead  of
       getting	the  result  data for the full repo from Watchman. Defaults to
       false.

       [fsmonitor]
       warn_when_unused = (boolean)

       Whether to print a warning during  certain  operations  when  fsmonitor
       would be beneficial to performance but isn't enabled.

       [fsmonitor]
       warn_update_file_count = (integer)

       If  warn_when_unused is set and fsmonitor isn't enabled, a warning will
       be printed during working directory updates if this many files will  be
       created.

   gpg
       commands to sign and verify changesets

   Commands
   sigcheck
       verify all the signatures there may be for a particular revision:

       hg sigcheck REV

       verify all the signatures there may be for a particular revision

   sign
       add a signature for the current or given revision:

       hg sign [OPTION]... [REV]...

       If  no  revision is given, the parent of the working directory is used,
       or tip if no revision is checked out.

       The gpg.cmd config setting can be used to specify the command to run. A
       default key can be specified with gpg.key.

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       Options:

       -l, --local
	      make the signature local

       -f, --force
	      sign even if the sigfile is modified

       --no-commit
	      do not commit the sigfile after signing

       -k,--key <ID>
	      the key id to sign with

       -m,--message <TEXT>
	      use text as commit message

       -e, --edit
	      invoke editor on commit messages

       -d,--date <DATE>
	      record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
	      record the specified user as committer

   sigs
       list signed changesets:

       hg sigs

       list signed changesets

   graphlog
       command to view revision graphs from a shell (DEPRECATED)

       The  functionality of this extension has been include in core Mercurial
       since version 2.3. Please use hg log -G ... instead.

       This extension adds a --graph option to the incoming, outgoing and  log
       commands.  When	this  options is given, an ASCII representation of the
       revision graph is also shown.

   Commands
   glog
       show revision history alongside an ASCII revision graph:

       hg glog [OPTION]... [FILE]

       Print a revision history alongside a revision graph  drawn  with	 ASCII
       characters.

       Nodes printed as an @ character are parents of the working directory.

       This is an alias to hg log -G.

       Options:

       -f, --follow
	      follow  changeset	 history,  or  file  history across copies and
	      renames

       --follow-first
	      only follow the first parent of merge changesets (DEPRECATED)

       -d,--date <DATE>
	      show revisions matching date spec

       -C, --copies
	      show copied files

       -k,--keyword <TEXT[+]>
	      do case-insensitive search for a given text

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      show the specified revision or revset

       --removed
	      include revisions where files were removed

       -m, --only-merges
	      show only merges (DEPRECATED)

       -u,--user <USER[+]>
	      revisions committed by user

       --only-branch <BRANCH[+]>
	      show only changesets within the given named branch (DEPRECATED)

       -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
	      show changesets within the given named branch

       -P,--prune <REV[+]>
	      do not display revision or any of its ancestors

       -p, --patch
	      show patch

       -g, --git
	      use git extended diff format

       -l,--limit <NUM>
	      limit number of changes displayed

       -M, --no-merges
	      do not show merges

       --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes

       -G, --graph
	      show the revision DAG

       --style <STYLE>
	      display using template map file (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   hgk
       browse the repository in a graphical way

       The hgk extension allows browsing the history  of  a  repository	 in  a
       graphical  way. It requires Tcl/Tk version 8.4 or later. (Tcl/Tk is not
       distributed with Mercurial.)

       hgk consists of two parts: a Tcl script that does  the  displaying  and
       querying	 of  information,  and an extension to Mercurial named hgk.py,
       which provides hooks for hgk to get information. hgk can	 be  found  in
       the contrib directory, and the extension is shipped in the hgext repos‐
       itory, and needs to be enabled.

       The hg view command will launch the hgk Tcl script. For this command to
       work, hgk must be in your search path. Alternately, you can specify the
       path to hgk in your configuration file:

       [hgk]
       path = /location/of/hgk

       hgk can make use of  the	 extdiff  extension  to	 visualize  revisions.
       Assuming you had already configured extdiff vdiff command, just add:

       [hgk]
       vdiff=vdiff

       Revisions  context  menu	 will  now  display additional entries to fire
       vdiff on hovered and selected revisions.

   Commands
   view
       start interactive history viewer:

       hg view [-l LIMIT] [REVRANGE]

       start interactive history viewer

       Options:

       -l,--limit <NUM>
	      limit number of changes displayed

   highlight
       syntax highlighting for hgweb (requires Pygments)

       It   depends   on   the	 Pygments   syntax    highlighting    library:
       http://pygments.org/

       There are the following configuration options:

       [web]
       pygments_style = <style> (default: colorful)
       highlightfiles = <fileset> (default: size('<5M'))
       highlightonlymatchfilename = <bool> (default False)

       highlightonlymatchfilename  will	 only  highlight  files	 if their type
       could be identified by their filename. When this is  not	 enabled  (the
       default),  Pygments  will  try very hard to identify the file type from
       content and any match (even matches with a low confidence  score)  will
       be used.

   histedit
       interactive history editing

       With  this extension installed, Mercurial gains one new command: histe‐
       dit. Usage is as follows, assuming the following history:

       @  3[tip]   7c2fd3b9020c	  2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
       |    Add delta
       |
       o  2   030b686bedc4   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
       |    Add gamma
       |
       o  1   c561b4e977df   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
       |    Add beta
       |
       o  0   d8d2fcd0e319   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
	    Add alpha

       If you were to run hg histedit c561b4e977df, you would see the  follow‐
       ing file open in your editor:

       pick c561b4e977df Add beta
       pick 030b686bedc4 Add gamma
       pick 7c2fd3b9020c Add delta

       # Edit history between c561b4e977df and 7c2fd3b9020c
       #
       # Commits are listed from least to most recent
       #
       # Commands:
       #  p, pick = use commit
       #  e, edit = use commit, but stop for amending
       #  f, fold = use commit, but combine it with the one above
       #  r, roll = like fold, but discard this commit's description and date
       #  d, drop = remove commit from history
       #  m, mess = edit commit message without changing commit content
       #  b, base = checkout changeset and apply further changesets from there
       #

       In  this	 file,	lines beginning with # are ignored. You must specify a
       rule for each revision in your history. For example, if you  had	 meant
       to  add	gamma  before  beta,  and then wanted to add delta in the same
       revision as beta, you would reorganize the file to look like this:

       pick 030b686bedc4 Add gamma
       pick c561b4e977df Add beta
       fold 7c2fd3b9020c Add delta

       # Edit history between c561b4e977df and 7c2fd3b9020c
       #
       # Commits are listed from least to most recent
       #
       # Commands:
       #  p, pick = use commit
       #  e, edit = use commit, but stop for amending
       #  f, fold = use commit, but combine it with the one above
       #  r, roll = like fold, but discard this commit's description and date
       #  d, drop = remove commit from history
       #  m, mess = edit commit message without changing commit content
       #  b, base = checkout changeset and apply further changesets from there
       #

       At which point you close the editor and histedit starts	working.  When
       you  specify  a	fold  operation,  histedit will open an editor when it
       folds those revisions together, offering you a chance to clean  up  the
       commit message:

       Add beta
       ***
       Add delta

       Edit the commit message to your liking, then close the editor. The date
       used for the commit will be the later of the two	 commits'  dates.  For
       this  example,  let's assume that the commit message was changed to Add
       beta and delta.	After histedit has run and had a chance to remove  any
       old or temporary revisions it needed, the history looks like this:

       @  2[tip]   989b4d060121	  2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
       |    Add beta and delta.
       |
       o  1   081603921c3f   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
       |    Add gamma
       |
       o  0   d8d2fcd0e319   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
	    Add alpha

       Note  that  histedit does not remove any revisions (even its own tempo‐
       rary ones) until after it has completed all the editing operations,  so
       it  will	 probably perform several strip operations when it's done. For
       the above example, it had to run strip twice. Strip can be slow depend‐
       ing  on a variety of factors, so you might need to be a little patient.
       You can choose to keep the original revisions  by  passing  the	--keep
       flag.

       The edit operation will drop you back to a command prompt, allowing you
       to edit files freely, or even use hg record to commit some changes as a
       separate	 commit.  When	you're done, any remaining uncommitted changes
       will be committed as well. When done, run  hg  histedit	--continue  to
       finish  this step. If there are uncommitted changes, you'll be prompted
       for a new commit message, but the default commit message	 will  be  the
       original message for the edit ed revision, and the date of the original
       commit will be preserved.

       The message operation will give you a chance to revise a commit message
       without	changing  the contents. It's a shortcut for doing edit immedi‐
       ately followed by hg histedit --continue`.

       If histedit encounters a conflict when moving a	revision  (while  han‐
       dling  pick  or	fold), it'll stop in a similar manner to edit with the
       difference that it won't prompt you for a commit message when done.  If
       you  decide  at this point that you don't like how much work it will be
       to rearrange history, or that you made a mistake, you can use hg histe‐
       dit  --abort to abandon the new changes you have made and return to the
       state before you attempted to edit your history.

       If we clone the histedit-ed example repository above and add four  more
       changes, such that we have the following history:

       @  6[tip]   038383181893	  2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   stefan
       |    Add theta
       |
       o  5   140988835471   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   stefan
       |    Add eta
       |
       o  4   122930637314   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   stefan
       |    Add zeta
       |
       o  3   836302820282   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   stefan
       |    Add epsilon
       |
       o  2   989b4d060121   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
       |    Add beta and delta.
       |
       o  1   081603921c3f   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
       |    Add gamma
       |
       o  0   d8d2fcd0e319   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
	    Add alpha

       If  you	run hg histedit --outgoing on the clone then it is the same as
       running hg histedit 836302820282. If you need plan to push to a reposi‐
       tory  that  Mercurial does not detect to be related to the source repo,
       you can add a --force option.

   Config
       Histedit rule lines are truncated to 80 characters by default. You  can
       customize  this behavior by setting a different length in your configu‐
       ration file:

       [histedit]
       linelen = 120	  # truncate rule lines at 120 characters

       hg histedit attempts to automatically choose an appropriate base	 revi‐
       sion  to use. To change which base revision is used, define a revset in
       your configuration file:

       [histedit]
       defaultrev = only(.) & draft()

       By default each edited revision needs to be present  in	histedit  com‐
       mands.  To remove revision you need to use drop operation. You can con‐
       figure the drop to be implicit for missing commits by adding:

       [histedit]
       dropmissing = True

       By default, histedit will close the transaction after each action.  For
       performance purposes, you can configure histedit to use a single trans‐
       action across the entire histedit. WARNING: This setting	 introduces  a
       significant  risk  of  losing the work you've done in a histedit if the
       histedit aborts unexpectedly:

       [histedit]
       singletransaction = True

   Commands
   histedit
       interactively edit changeset history:

       hg histedit [OPTIONS] ([ANCESTOR] | --outgoing [URL])

       This command lets you edit a linear series of  changesets  (up  to  and
       including the working directory, which should be clean).	 You can:

       · pick to [re]order a changeset

       · drop to omit changeset

       · mess to reword the changeset commit message

       · fold  to  combine  it	with  the preceding changeset (using the later
	 date)

       · roll like fold, but discarding this commit's description and date

       · edit to edit this changeset (preserving date)

       · base to checkout changeset and apply further changesets from there

       There are a number of ways to select the root changeset:

       · Specify ANCESTOR directly

       · Use --outgoing -- it will be the first linear changeset not  included
	 in destination. (See hg help config.paths.default-push)

       · Otherwise,  the value from the "histedit.defaultrev" config option is
	 used as a revset to select the base revision  when  ANCESTOR  is  not
	 specified.  The  first	 revision  returned  by the revset is used. By
	 default, this selects the editable history  that  is  unique  to  the
	 ancestry of the working directory.

       If  you	use --outgoing, this command will abort if there are ambiguous
       outgoing revisions. For example, if there are  multiple	branches  con‐
       taining outgoing revisions.

       Use  "min(outgoing()  and ::.)" or similar revset specification instead
       of --outgoing to specify edit target revision exactly in such ambiguous
       situation. See hg help revsets for detail about selecting revisions.

       Examples:

	  · A  number  of  changes  have  been	made.  Revision 3 is no longer
	    needed.

	    Start history editing from revision 3:

	    hg histedit -r 3

	    An editor opens, containing the list of revisions,	with  specific
	    actions specified:

	    pick 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar
	    pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog
	    pick 0a9639fcda9d 5 Morgify the cromulancy

	    Additional	information about the possible actions to take appears
	    below the list of revisions.

	    To remove revision 3 from the history, its action (at  the	begin‐
	    ning of the relevant line) is changed to 'drop':

	    drop 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar
	    pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog
	    pick 0a9639fcda9d 5 Morgify the cromulancy

	  · A  number  of changes have been made.  Revision 2 and 4 need to be
	    swapped.

	    Start history editing from revision 2:

	    hg histedit -r 2

	    An editor opens, containing the list of revisions,	with  specific
	    actions specified:

	    pick 252a1af424ad 2 Blorb a morgwazzle
	    pick 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar
	    pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog

	    To swap revision 2 and 4, its lines are swapped in the editor:

	    pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog
	    pick 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar
	    pick 252a1af424ad 2 Blorb a morgwazzle

       Returns	0 on success, 1 if user intervention is required (not only for
       intentional "edit" command, but	also  for  resolving  unexpected  con‐
       flicts).

       Options:

       --commands <FILE>
	      read history edits from the specified file

       -c, --continue
	      continue an edit already in progress

       --edit-plan
	      edit remaining actions list

       -k, --keep
	      don't strip old nodes after edit is complete

       --abort
	      abort an edit in progress

       -o, --outgoing
	      changesets not found in destination

       -f, --force
	      force outgoing even for unrelated repositories

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      first revision to be edited

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   journal
       track previous positions of bookmarks (EXPERIMENTAL)

       This  extension	adds  a new command: hg journal, which shows you where
       bookmarks were previously located.

   Commands
   journal
       show the previous position of bookmarks and the working copy:

       hg journal [OPTION]... [BOOKMARKNAME]

       The journal is used to see the previous commits that bookmarks and  the
       working	copy  pointed  to.  By	default the previous locations for the
       working copy.  Passing a bookmark name will show all the previous posi‐
       tions of that bookmark. Use the --all switch to show previous locations
       for all bookmarks and the working copy; each line will then include the
       bookmark name, or '.' for the working copy, as well.

       If name starts with re:, the remainder of the name is treated as a reg‐
       ular expression. To match a name that actually starts with re:, use the
       prefix literal:.

       By  default  hg journal only shows the commit hash and the command that
       was running at that time. -v/--verbose will show the  prior  hash,  the
       user, and the time at which it happened.

       Use -c/--commits to output log information on each commit hash; at this
       point you can use the  usual  --patch,  --git,  --stat  and  --template
       switches to alter the log output for these.

       hg journal -T json can be used to produce machine readable output.

       Options:

       --all  show history for all names

       -c, --commits
	      show commit metadata

       -p, --patch
	      show patch

       -g, --git
	      use git extended diff format

       -l,--limit <NUM>
	      limit number of changes displayed

       --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes

       --style <STYLE>
	      display using template map file (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template

   keyword
       expand keywords in tracked files

       This  extension	expands	 RCS/CVS-like or self-customized $Keywords$ in
       tracked text files selected by your configuration.

       Keywords are only expanded in local repositories and not stored in  the
       change  history. The mechanism can be regarded as a convenience for the
       current user or for archive distribution.

       Keywords expand to the changeset data pertaining to the	latest	change
       relative to the working directory parent of each file.

       Configuration  is done in the [keyword], [keywordset] and [keywordmaps]
       sections of hgrc files.

       Example:

       [keyword]
       # expand keywords in every python file except those matching "x*"
       **.py =
       x*    = ignore

       [keywordset]
       # prefer svn- over cvs-like default keywordmaps
       svn = True

       Note   The more specific you are in your filename patterns the less you
	      lose speed in huge repositories.

       For [keywordmaps] template mapping and expansion demonstration and con‐
       trol run hg kwdemo. See hg help templates for a list of available  tem‐
       plates and filters.

       Three additional date template filters are provided:

       utcdate

	      "2006/09/18 15:13:13"

       svnutcdate

	      "2006-09-18 15:13:13Z"

       svnisodate

	      "2006-09-18 08:13:13 -700 (Mon, 18 Sep 2006)"

       The  default template mappings (view with hg kwdemo -d) can be replaced
       with customized keywords and templates. Again, run hg kwdemo to control
       the results of your configuration changes.

       Before  changing/disabling active keywords, you must run hg kwshrink to
       avoid storing expanded keywords in the change history.

       To force expansion after enabling it, or a configuration change, run hg
       kwexpand.

       Expansions spanning more than one line and incremental expansions, like
       CVS' $Log$, are not supported. A keyword template map  "Log  =  {desc}"
       expands to the first line of the changeset description.

   Commands
   kwdemo
       print [keywordmaps] configuration and an expansion example:

       hg kwdemo [-d] [-f RCFILE] [TEMPLATEMAP]...

       Show current, custom, or default keyword template maps and their expan‐
       sions.

       Extend the current configuration by specifying maps  as	arguments  and
       using -f/--rcfile to source an external hgrc file.

       Use -d/--default to disable current configuration.

       See hg help templates for information on templates and filters.

       Options:

       -d, --default
	      show default keyword template maps

       -f,--rcfile <FILE>
	      read maps from rcfile

   kwexpand
       expand keywords in the working directory:

       hg kwexpand [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Run after (re)enabling keyword expansion.

       kwexpand refuses to run if given files contain local changes.

       Options:

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   kwfiles
       show files configured for keyword expansion:

       hg kwfiles [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       List  which files in the working directory are matched by the [keyword]
       configuration patterns.

       Useful to prevent inadvertent keyword expansion and to speed up	execu‐
       tion by including only files that are actual candidates for expansion.

       See hg help keyword on how to construct patterns both for inclusion and
       exclusion of files.

       With -A/--all and -v/--verbose the codes used to	 show  the  status  of
       files are:

       K = keyword expansion candidate
       k = keyword expansion candidate (not tracked)
       I = ignored
       i = ignored (not tracked)

       Options:

       -A, --all
	      show keyword status flags of all files

       -i, --ignore
	      show files excluded from expansion

       -u, --unknown
	      only show unknown (not tracked) files

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   kwshrink
       revert expanded keywords in the working directory:

       hg kwshrink [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Must be run before changing/disabling active keywords.

       kwshrink refuses to run if given files contain local changes.

       Options:

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   largefiles
       track large binary files

       Large binary files tend to be not very compressible, not very diffable,
       and not at all mergeable. Such files are	 not  handled  efficiently  by
       Mercurial's  storage  format  (revlog),	which  is  based on compressed
       binary deltas; storing large binary files as  regular  Mercurial	 files
       wastes bandwidth and disk space and increases Mercurial's memory usage.
       The largefiles extension addresses these problems by adding a  central‐
       ized client-server layer on top of Mercurial: largefiles live in a cen‐
       tral store out on the network somewhere, and you only fetch  the	 revi‐
       sions that you need when you need them.

       largefiles  works  by  maintaining  a "standin file" in .hglf/ for each
       largefile. The standins are small (41 bytes: an SHA-1  hash  plus  new‐
       line)  and are tracked by Mercurial. Largefile revisions are identified
       by the SHA-1 hash of their contents, which is written to	 the  standin.
       largefiles uses that revision ID to get/put largefile revisions from/to
       the central store. This saves both disk space and bandwidth, since  you
       don't need to retrieve all historical revisions of large files when you
       clone or pull.

       To start a new repository or add	 new  large  binary  files,  just  add
       --large to your hg add command. For example:

       $ dd if=/dev/urandom of=randomdata count=2000
       $ hg add --large randomdata
       $ hg commit -m "add randomdata as a largefile"

       When  you  push	a  changeset that adds/modifies largefiles to a remote
       repository, its largefile revisions will be  uploaded  along  with  it.
       Note  that the remote Mercurial must also have the largefiles extension
       enabled for this to work.

       When you pull a changeset that affects largefiles from a remote reposi‐
       tory,  the  largefiles  for the changeset will by default not be pulled
       down. However, when you update  to  such	 a  revision,  any  largefiles
       needed  by  that revision are downloaded and cached (if they have never
       been downloaded before). One way to pull	 largefiles  when  pulling  is
       thus to use --update, which will update your working copy to the latest
       pulled revision (and thereby downloading any new largefiles).

       If you want to pull largefiles you don't need for update yet, then  you
       can use pull with the --lfrev option or the hg lfpull command.

       If  you	know  you  are pulling from a non-default location and want to
       download all the largefiles that correspond to the  new	changesets  at
       the same time, then you can pull with --lfrev "pulled()".

       If  you just want to ensure that you will have the largefiles needed to
       merge or rebase with new heads that you are pulling, then you can  pull
       with --lfrev "head(pulled())" flag to pre-emptively download any large‐
       files that are new in the heads you are pulling.

       Keep in mind that network access may  now  be  required	to  update  to
       changesets  that	 you have not previously updated to. The nature of the
       largefiles extension means that updating is no longer guaranteed to  be
       a local-only operation.

       If you already have large files tracked by Mercurial without the large‐
       files extension, you will need to convert your repository in  order  to
       benefit from largefiles. This is done with the hg lfconvert command:

       $ hg lfconvert --size 10 oldrepo newrepo

       In repositories that already have largefiles in them, any new file over
       10MB will automatically be added as a largefile. To change this thresh‐
       old,  set largefiles.minsize in your Mercurial config file to the mini‐
       mum size in megabytes to track as a  largefile,	or  use	 the  --lfsize
       option to the add command (also in megabytes):

       [largefiles]
       minsize = 2

       $ hg add --lfsize 2

       The  largefiles.patterns	 config option allows you to specify a list of
       filename patterns (see hg help patterns) that should always be  tracked
       as largefiles:

       [largefiles]
       patterns =
	 *.jpg
	 re:.*\.(png|bmp)$
	 library.zip
	 content/audio/*

       Files  that  match  one	of  these patterns will be added as largefiles
       regardless of their size.

       The largefiles.minsize and largefiles.patterns config options  will  be
       ignored for any repositories not already containing a largefile. To add
       the first largefile to a repository, you must explicitly do so with the
       --large flag passed to the hg add command.

   Commands
   lfconvert
       convert a normal repository to a largefiles repository:

       hg lfconvert SOURCE DEST [FILE ...]

       Convert repository SOURCE to a new repository DEST, identical to SOURCE
       except that certain files will be  converted  as	 largefiles:  specifi‐
       cally,  any  file  that	matches any PATTERN or whose size is above the
       minimum size threshold is converted as a largefile. The	size  used  to
       determine  whether or not to track a file as a largefile is the size of
       the first version of the file. The minimum size can be specified either
       with --size or in configuration as largefiles.size.

       After  running  this command you will need to make sure that largefiles
       is enabled anywhere you intend to push the new repository.

       Use --to-normal to convert largefiles back to normal files; after this,
       the DEST repository can be used without largefiles at all.

       Options:

       -s,--size <SIZE>
	      minimum size (MB) for files to be converted as largefiles

       --to-normal
	      convert from a largefiles repo to a normal repo

   lfpull
       pull largefiles for the specified revisions from the specified source:

       hg lfpull -r REV... [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [SOURCE]

       Pull  largefiles	 that are referenced from local changesets but missing
       locally, pulling from a remote repository to the local cache.

       If SOURCE is omitted, the 'default' path will be	 used.	 See  hg  help
       urls for more information.

       Some examples:

       · pull largefiles for all branch heads:

	 hg lfpull -r "head() and not closed()"

       · pull largefiles on the default branch:

	 hg lfpull -r "branch(default)"

       Options:

       -r,--rev <VALUE[+]>
	      pull largefiles for these revisions

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
	      specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
	      specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
	      do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   logtoprocess
       send ui.log() data to a subprocess (EXPERIMENTAL)

       This  extension	lets  you  specify a shell command per ui.log() event,
       sending all remaining arguments to as  environment  variables  to  that
       command.

       Each  positional	 argument to the method results in a MSG[N] key in the
       environment, starting at 1 (so MSG1, MSG2, etc.). Each keyword argument
       is  set	as a OPT_UPPERCASE_KEY variable (so the key is uppercased, and
       prefixed with OPT_). The original event name is	passed	in  the	 EVENT
       environment  variable,  and  the	 process  ID  of mercurial is given in
       HGPID.

       So given a call ui.log('foo', 'bar', 'baz', spam='eggs'), a script con‐
       figured	for  the  `foo	event can expect an environment with MSG1=bar,
       MSG2=baz, and OPT_SPAM=eggs.

       Scripts are configured in the [logtoprocess] section, each key an event
       name.  For example:

       [logtoprocess]
       commandexception = echo "$MSG2$MSG3" > /var/log/mercurial_exceptions.log

       would  log the warning message and traceback of any failed command dis‐
       patch.

       Scripts are run asynchronously as detached daemon processes;  mercurial
       will not ensure that they exit cleanly.

   mq
       manage a stack of patches

       This  extension	lets  you  work with a stack of patches in a Mercurial
       repository. It manages two stacks of patches - all known	 patches,  and
       applied patches (subset of known patches).

       Known  patches are represented as patch files in the .hg/patches direc‐
       tory. Applied patches are both patch files and changesets.

       Common tasks (use hg help COMMAND for more details):

       create new patch				 qnew
       import existing patch			 qimport

       print patch series			 qseries
       print applied patches			 qapplied

       add known patch to applied stack		 qpush
       remove patch from applied stack		 qpop
       refresh contents of top applied patch	 qrefresh

       By default, mq will automatically use  git  patches  when  required  to
       avoid  losing  file  mode  changes, copy records, binary files or empty
       files creations or deletions. This behavior can be configured with:

       [mq]
       git = auto/keep/yes/no

       If set to 'keep', mq will obey the [diff] section  configuration	 while
       preserving existing git patches upon qrefresh. If set to 'yes' or 'no',
       mq will override the [diff] section and always generate git or  regular
       patches, possibly losing data in the second case.

       It  may	be  desirable for mq changesets to be kept in the secret phase
       (see hg help phases), which can be enabled with the following setting:

       [mq]
       secret = True

       You will by default be managing a patch queue named "patches". You  can
       create other, independent patch queues with the hg qqueue command.

       If  the	working	 directory contains uncommitted files, qpush, qpop and
       qgoto abort immediately. If -f/--force is used, the  changes  are  dis‐
       carded. Setting:

       [mq]
       keepchanges = True

       make  them behave as if --keep-changes were passed, and non-conflicting
       local changes will be tolerated and preserved. If incompatible  options
       such as -f/--force or --exact are passed, this setting is ignored.

       This  extension used to provide a strip command. This command now lives
       in the strip extension.

   Commands
   qapplied
       print the patches already applied:

       hg qapplied [-1] [-s] [PATCH]

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -1, --last
	      show only the preceding applied patch

       -s, --summary
	      print first line of patch header

   qclone
       clone main and patch repository at same time:

       hg qclone [OPTION]... SOURCE [DEST]

       If source is local, destination will have no patches applied. If source
       is remote, this command can not check if patches are applied in source,
       so cannot guarantee that patches are not applied in destination. If you
       clone remote repository, be sure before that it has no patches applied.

       Source  patch repository is looked for in <src>/.hg/patches by default.
       Use -p <url> to change.

       The patch directory must be a nested Mercurial repository, as would  be
       created by hg init --mq.

       Return 0 on success.

       Options:

       --pull use pull protocol to copy metadata

       -U, --noupdate
	      do not update the new working directories

       --uncompressed
	      use uncompressed transfer (fast over LAN)

       -p,--patches <REPO>
	      location of source patch repository

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
	      specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
	      specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
	      do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

   qcommit
       commit changes in the queue repository (DEPRECATED):

       hg qcommit [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       This command is deprecated; use hg commit --mq instead.

       Options:

       -A, --addremove
	      mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing

       --close-branch
	      mark a branch head as closed

       --amend
	      amend the parent of the working directory

       -s, --secret
	      use the secret phase for committing

       -e, --edit
	      invoke editor on commit messages

       -i, --interactive
	      use interactive mode

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       -m,--message <TEXT>
	      use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
	      read commit message from file

       -d,--date <DATE>
	      record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
	      record the specified user as committer

       -S, --subrepos
	      recurse into subrepositories

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

	  aliases: qci

   qdelete
       remove patches from queue:

       hg qdelete [-k] [PATCH]...

       The  patches  must  not be applied, and at least one patch is required.
       Exact patch identifiers must be given. With -k/--keep, the patch	 files
       are preserved in the patch directory.

       To stop managing a patch and move it into permanent history, use the hg
       qfinish command.

       Options:

       -k, --keep
	      keep patch file

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      stop managing a revision (DEPRECATED)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

	  aliases: qremove qrm

   qdiff
       diff of the current patch and subsequent modifications:

       hg qdiff [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Shows a diff which includes the current patch as well  as  any  changes
       which  have  been  made in the working directory since the last refresh
       (thus showing what the current patch would become after a qrefresh).

       Use hg diff if you only want to see the changes	made  since  the  last
       qrefresh, or hg export qtip if you want to see changes made by the cur‐
       rent patch without including changes made since the qrefresh.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -a, --text
	      treat all files as text

       -g, --git
	      use git extended diff format

       --binary
	      generate binary diffs in git mode (default)

       --nodates
	      omit dates from diff headers

       --noprefix
	      omit a/ and b/ prefixes from filenames

       -p, --show-function
	      show which function each change is in

       --reverse
	      produce a diff that undoes the changes

       -w, --ignore-all-space
	      ignore white space when comparing lines

       -b, --ignore-space-change
	      ignore changes in the amount of white space

       -B, --ignore-blank-lines
	      ignore changes whose lines are all blank

       -Z, --ignore-space-at-eol
	      ignore changes in whitespace at EOL

       -U,--unified <NUM>
	      number of lines of context to show

       --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes

       --root <DIR>
	      produce diffs relative to subdirectory

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   qfinish
       move applied patches into repository history:

       hg qfinish [-a] [REV]...

       Finishes the specified revisions (corresponding to applied patches)  by
       moving them out of mq control into regular repository history.

       Accepts	a  revision  range or the -a/--applied option. If --applied is
       specified, all applied mq revisions are removed from mq control. Other‐
       wise,  the  given revisions must be at the base of the stack of applied
       patches.

       This can be especially useful if your changes have been applied	to  an
       upstream	 repository,  or  if  you  are	about  to push your changes to
       upstream.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -a, --applied
	      finish all applied changesets

   qfold
       fold the named patches into the current patch:

       hg qfold [-e] [-k] [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] PATCH...

       Patches must not yet  be	 applied.  Each	 patch	will  be  successively
       applied	to  the	 current  patch in the order given. If all the patches
       apply successfully, the current patch will be refreshed	with  the  new
       cumulative  patch,  and	the  folded  patches  will  be	deleted.  With
       -k/--keep, the folded patch files will not be removed afterwards.

       The header for each folded patch will be concatenated with the  current
       patch header, separated by a line of * * *.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -e, --edit
	      invoke editor on commit messages

       -k, --keep
	      keep folded patch files

       -m,--message <TEXT>
	      use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
	      read commit message from file

   qgoto
       push or pop patches until named patch is at top of stack:

       hg qgoto [OPTION]... PATCH

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       --keep-changes
	      tolerate non-conflicting local changes

       -f, --force
	      overwrite any local changes

       --no-backup
	      do not save backup copies of files

   qguard
       set or print guards for a patch:

       hg qguard [-l] [-n] [PATCH] [-- [+GUARD]... [-GUARD]...]

       Guards control whether a patch can be pushed. A patch with no guards is
       always pushed. A patch with a positive guard ("+foo") is pushed only if
       the  hg qselect command has activated it. A patch with a negative guard
       ("-foo") is never pushed if the hg qselect command has activated it.

       With no arguments, print the currently active guards.  With  arguments,
       set guards for the named patch.

       Note   Specifying negative guards now requires '--'.

       To set guards on another patch:

       hg qguard other.patch -- +2.6.17 -stable

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -l, --list
	      list all patches and guards

       -n, --none
	      drop all guards

   qheader
       print the header of the topmost or specified patch:

       hg qheader [PATCH]

       Returns 0 on success.

   qimport
       import a patch or existing changeset:

       hg qimport [-e] [-n NAME] [-f] [-g] [-P] [-r REV]... [FILE]...

       The  patch is inserted into the series after the last applied patch. If
       no patches have been applied, qimport prepends the patch to the series.

       The patch will have the same name as its source file unless you give it
       a new one with -n/--name.

       You  can register an existing patch inside the patch directory with the
       -e/--existing flag.

       With -f/--force, an existing patch of the same name will	 be  overwrit‐
       ten.

       An  existing  changeset	may  be	 placed under mq control with -r/--rev
       (e.g. qimport --rev . -n patch will place the current revision under mq
       control).  With	-g/--git, patches imported with --rev will use the git
       diff format. See the diffs help topic for information on	 why  this  is
       important   for	 preserving  rename/copy  information  and  permission
       changes. Use hg qfinish to remove changesets from mq control.

       To import a patch from standard input, pass - as the patch file.	  When
       importing from standard input, a patch name must be specified using the
       --name flag.

       To import an existing patch while renaming it:

       hg qimport -e existing-patch -n new-name

       Returns 0 if import succeeded.

       Options:

       -e, --existing
	      import file in patch directory

       -n,--name <NAME>
	      name of patch file

       -f, --force
	      overwrite existing files

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      place existing revisions under mq control

       -g, --git
	      use git extended diff format

       -P, --push
	      qpush after importing

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   qinit
       init a new queue repository (DEPRECATED):

       hg qinit [-c]

       The queue repository is unversioned by default. If -c/--create-repo  is
       specified,  qinit  will create a separate nested repository for patches
       (qinit -c may also be run later to convert an unversioned patch reposi‐
       tory  into  a  versioned one). You can use qcommit to commit changes to
       this queue repository.

       This command is deprecated. Without -c, it's implied by other  relevant
       commands. With -c, use hg init --mq instead.

       Options:

       -c, --create-repo
	      create queue repository

   qnew
       create a new patch:

       hg qnew [-e] [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] PATCH [FILE]...

       qnew  creates  a	 new  patch  on top of the currently-applied patch (if
       any). The patch will be initialized with any outstanding changes in the
       working	directory. You may also use -I/--include, -X/--exclude, and/or
       a list of files after the patch name to add only	 changes  to  matching
       files to the new patch, leaving the rest as uncommitted modifications.

       -u/--user  and  -d/--date can be used to set the (given) user and date,
       respectively. -U/--currentuser and -D/--currentdate set user to current
       user and date to current date.

       -e/--edit, -m/--message or -l/--logfile set the patch header as well as
       the commit message. If none is specified, the header is empty  and  the
       commit message is '[mq]: PATCH'.

       Use the -g/--git option to keep the patch in the git extended diff for‐
       mat. Read the diffs help topic for more	information  on	 why  this  is
       important  for  preserving  permission changes and copy/rename informa‐
       tion.

       Returns 0 on successful creation of a new patch.

       Options:

       -e, --edit
	      invoke editor on commit messages

       -f, --force
	      import uncommitted changes (DEPRECATED)

       -g, --git
	      use git extended diff format

       -U, --currentuser
	      add "From: <current user>" to patch

       -u,--user <USER>
	      add "From: <USER>" to patch

       -D, --currentdate
	      add "Date: <current date>" to patch

       -d,--date <DATE>
	      add "Date: <DATE>" to patch

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       -m,--message <TEXT>
	      use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
	      read commit message from file

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   qnext
       print the name of the next pushable patch:

       hg qnext [-s]

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -s, --summary
	      print first line of patch header

   qpop
       pop the current patch off the stack:

       hg qpop [-a] [-f] [PATCH | INDEX]

       Without argument, pops off the top of the patch stack. If given a patch
       name,  keeps popping off patches until the named patch is at the top of
       the stack.

       By  default,  abort  if	the  working  directory	 contains  uncommitted
       changes. With --keep-changes, abort only if the uncommitted files over‐
       lap with patched files. With -f/--force,	 backup	 and  discard  changes
       made to such files.

       Return 0 on success.

       Options:

       -a, --all
	      pop all patches

       -n,--name <NAME>
	      queue name to pop (DEPRECATED)

       --keep-changes
	      tolerate non-conflicting local changes

       -f, --force
	      forget any local changes to patched files

       --no-backup
	      do not save backup copies of files

   qprev
       print the name of the preceding applied patch:

       hg qprev [-s]

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -s, --summary
	      print first line of patch header

   qpush
       push the next patch onto the stack:

       hg qpush [-f] [-l] [-a] [--move] [PATCH | INDEX]

       By  default,  abort  if	the  working  directory	 contains  uncommitted
       changes. With --keep-changes, abort only if the uncommitted files over‐
       lap  with  patched files. With -f/--force, backup and patch over uncom‐
       mitted changes.

       Return 0 on success.

       Options:

       --keep-changes
	      tolerate non-conflicting local changes

       -f, --force
	      apply on top of local changes

       -e, --exact
	      apply the target patch to its recorded parent

       -l, --list
	      list patch name in commit text

       -a, --all
	      apply all patches

       -m, --merge
	      merge from another queue (DEPRECATED)

       -n,--name <NAME>
	      merge queue name (DEPRECATED)

       --move reorder patch series and apply only the patch

       --no-backup
	      do not save backup copies of files

   qqueue
       manage multiple patch queues:

       hg qqueue [OPTION] [QUEUE]

       Supports switching between different patch queues, as well as  creating
       new patch queues and deleting existing ones.

       Omitting	 a queue name or specifying -l/--list will show you the regis‐
       tered queues - by default the "normal" patches queue is registered. The
       currently  active  queue	 will  be  marked  with "(active)". Specifying
       --active will print only the name of the active queue.

       To create a new queue, use -c/--create. The queue is automatically made
       active,	except	in  the	 case where there are applied patches from the
       currently active queue in the repository. Then the queue will  only  be
       created and switching will fail.

       To  delete  an existing queue, use --delete. You cannot delete the cur‐
       rently active queue.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -l, --list
	      list all available queues

       --active
	      print name of active queue

       -c, --create
	      create new queue

       --rename
	      rename active queue

       --delete
	      delete reference to queue

       --purge
	      delete queue, and remove patch dir

   qrefresh
       update the current patch:

       hg qrefresh [-I] [-X] [-e] [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] [-s] [FILE]...

       If any file patterns are provided, the  refreshed  patch	 will  contain
       only the modifications that match those patterns; the remaining modifi‐
       cations will remain in the working directory.

       If -s/--short is specified, files currently included in the patch  will
       be refreshed just like matched files and remain in the patch.

       If  -e/--edit is specified, Mercurial will start your configured editor
       for you to enter a message. In case qrefresh fails,  you	 will  find  a
       backup of your message in .hg/last-message.txt.

       hg  add/remove/copy/rename  work as usual, though you might want to use
       git-style patches (-g/--git  or	[diff]	git=1)	to  track  copies  and
       renames.	 See the diffs help topic for more information on the git diff
       format.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -e, --edit
	      invoke editor on commit messages

       -g, --git
	      use git extended diff format

       -s, --short
	      refresh only files already in the patch and specified files

       -U, --currentuser
	      add/update author field in patch with current user

       -u,--user <USER>
	      add/update author field in patch with given user

       -D, --currentdate
	      add/update date field in patch with current date

       -d,--date <DATE>
	      add/update date field in patch with given date

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       -m,--message <TEXT>
	      use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
	      read commit message from file

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   qrename
       rename a patch:

       hg qrename PATCH1 [PATCH2]

       With one argument, renames the current patch to PATCH1.	With two argu‐
       ments, renames PATCH1 to PATCH2.

       Returns 0 on success.

	  aliases: qmv

   qrestore
       restore the queue state saved by a revision (DEPRECATED):

       hg qrestore [-d] [-u] REV

       This command is deprecated, use hg rebase instead.

       Options:

       -d, --delete
	      delete save entry

       -u, --update
	      update queue working directory

   qsave
       save current queue state (DEPRECATED):

       hg qsave [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] [-c] [-n NAME] [-e] [-f]

       This command is deprecated, use hg rebase instead.

       Options:

       -c, --copy
	      copy patch directory

       -n,--name <NAME>
	      copy directory name

       -e, --empty
	      clear queue status file

       -f, --force
	      force copy

       -m,--message <TEXT>
	      use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
	      read commit message from file

   qselect
       set or print guarded patches to push:

       hg qselect [OPTION]... [GUARD]...

       Use  the	 hg  qguard command  to set or print guards on patch, then use
       qselect to tell mq which guards to use. A patch will be	pushed	if  it
       has  no	guards	or  any	 positive  guards match the currently selected
       guard, but will not be pushed if any negative guards match the  current
       guard. For example:

       qguard foo.patch -- -stable    (negative guard)
       qguard bar.patch	   +stable    (positive guard)
       qselect stable

       This  activates	the "stable" guard. mq will skip foo.patch (because it
       has a negative match) but push bar.patch (because  it  has  a  positive
       match).

       With  no arguments, prints the currently active guards.	With one argu‐
       ment, sets the active guard.

       Use -n/--none to deactivate guards (no other arguments  needed).	  When
       no  guards  are	active,	 patches  with positive guards are skipped and
       patches with negative guards are pushed.

       qselect can change the guards on	 applied  patches.  It	does  not  pop
       guarded	patches	 by default. Use --pop to pop back to the last applied
       patch that is not guarded. Use --reapply (which implies --pop) to  push
       back to the current patch afterwards, but skip guarded patches.

       Use  -s/--series	 to  print a list of all guards in the series file (no
       other arguments needed). Use -v for more information.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -n, --none
	      disable all guards

       -s, --series
	      list all guards in series file

       --pop  pop to before first guarded applied patch

       --reapply
	      pop, then reapply patches

   qseries
       print the entire series file:

       hg qseries [-ms]

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -m, --missing
	      print patches not in series

       -s, --summary
	      print first line of patch header

   qtop
       print the name of the current patch:

       hg qtop [-s]

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -s, --summary
	      print first line of patch header

   qunapplied
       print the patches not yet applied:

       hg qunapplied [-1] [-s] [PATCH]

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -1, --first
	      show only the first patch

       -s, --summary
	      print first line of patch header

   notify
       hooks for sending email push notifications

       This extension  implements  hooks  to  send  email  notifications  when
       changesets are sent from or received by the local repository.

       First,  enable  the  extension  as explained in hg help extensions, and
       register the hook you want to run. incoming and changegroup  hooks  are
       run  when changesets are received, while outgoing hooks are for change‐
       sets sent to another repository:

       [hooks]
       # one email for each incoming changeset
       incoming.notify = python:hgext.notify.hook
       # one email for all incoming changesets
       changegroup.notify = python:hgext.notify.hook

       # one email for all outgoing changesets
       outgoing.notify = python:hgext.notify.hook

       This registers the hooks. To enable notification, subscribers  must  be
       assigned	 to repositories. The [usersubs] section maps multiple reposi‐
       tories to a given  recipient.  The  [reposubs]  section	maps  multiple
       recipients to a single repository:

       [usersubs]
       # key is subscriber email, value is a comma-separated list of repo patterns
       user@host = pattern

       [reposubs]
       # key is repo pattern, value is a comma-separated list of subscriber emails
       pattern = user@host

       A pattern is a glob matching the absolute path to a repository, option‐
       ally combined  with  a  revset  expression.  A  revset  expression,  if
       present, is separated from the glob by a hash. Example:

       [reposubs]
       */widgets#branch(release) = qa-team@example.com

       This  sends  to qa-team@example.com whenever a changeset on the release
       branch triggers a notification in any repository ending in widgets.

       In order to place them under direct  user  management,  [usersubs]  and
       [reposubs]  sections may be placed in a separate hgrc file and incorpo‐
       rated by reference:

       [notify]
       config = /path/to/subscriptionsfile

       Notifications will not be sent until the notify.test value  is  set  to
       False; see below.

       Notifications  content  can be tweaked with the following configuration
       entries:

       notify.test
	      If True, print messages  to  stdout  instead  of	sending	 them.
	      Default: True.

       notify.sources
	      Space-separated  list of change sources. Notifications are acti‐
	      vated only when a changeset's source is in  this	list.  Sources
	      may be:

	      serve

		     changesets received via http or ssh

	      pull

		     changesets received via hg pull

	      unbundle

		     changesets received via hg unbundle

	      push

		     changesets sent or received via hg push

	      bundle

		     changesets sent via hg unbundle

	      Default: serve.

       notify.strip
	      Number  of  leading slashes to strip from url paths. By default,
	      notifications reference repositories with their  absolute	 path.
	      notify.strip  lets  you turn them into relative paths. For exam‐
	      ple,  notify.strip=3  will  change  /long/path/repository	  into
	      repository. Default: 0.

       notify.domain
	      Default  email  domain for sender or recipients with no explicit
	      domain.

       notify.style
	      Style file to use when formatting emails.

       notify.template
	      Template to use when formatting emails.

       notify.incoming
	      Template to  use	when  run  as  an  incoming  hook,  overriding
	      notify.template.

       notify.outgoing
	      Template	to  use	 when  run  as	an  outgoing  hook, overriding
	      notify.template.

       notify.changegroup
	      Template to use when running as a changegroup  hook,  overriding
	      notify.template.

       notify.maxdiff
	      Maximum  number  of diff lines to include in notification email.
	      Set to 0 to disable the diff,  or	 -1  to	 include  all  of  it.
	      Default: 300.

       notify.maxsubject
	      Maximum  number  of characters in email's subject line. Default:
	      67.

       notify.diffstat
	      Set to True to include a diffstat before diff content.  Default:
	      True.

       notify.merge
	      If True, send notifications for merge changesets. Default: True.

       notify.mbox
	      If  set,	append	mails  to  this	 mbox file instead of sending.
	      Default: None.

       notify.fromauthor
	      If set, use the committer of the first changeset	in  a  change‐
	      group for the "From" field of the notification mail. If not set,
	      take the user from the pushing repo.  Default: False.

       If set, the following entries will also be used to customize the	 noti‐
       fications:

       email.from
	      Email  From address to use if none can be found in the generated
	      email content.

       web.baseurl
	      Root repository URL to combine with repository paths when making
	      references. See also notify.strip.

   pager
       browse command output with an external pager (DEPRECATED)

       Forcibly	 enable	 paging	 for  individual commands that don't typically
       request pagination with the attend-<command> option. This setting takes
       precedence over ignore options and defaults:

       [pager]
       attend-cat = false

   patchbomb
       command to send changesets as (a series of) patch emails

       The  series  is started off with a "[PATCH 0 of N]" introduction, which
       describes the series as a whole.

       Each patch email has a Subject line of "[PATCH M of N] ...", using  the
       first  line  of the changeset description as the subject text. The mes‐
       sage contains two or three body parts:

       · The changeset description.

       · [Optional] The result of running diffstat on the patch.

       · The patch itself, as generated by hg export.

       Each message refers to the first in the series  using  the  In-Reply-To
       and  References headers, so they will show up as a sequence in threaded
       mail and news readers, and in mail archives.

       To configure other defaults, add a section like this to your configura‐
       tion file:

       [email]
       from = My Name <my@email>
       to = recipient1, recipient2, ...
       cc = cc1, cc2, ...
       bcc = bcc1, bcc2, ...
       reply-to = address1, address2, ...

       Use  [patchbomb]	 as configuration section name if you need to override
       global [email] address settings.

       Then you can use the hg email command to mail a series of changesets as
       a patchbomb.

       You can also either configure the method option in the email section to
       be a sendmail compatible mailer or fill out the [smtp] section so  that
       the patchbomb extension can automatically send patchbombs directly from
       the commandline. See the [email] and [smtp]  sections  in  hgrc(5)  for
       details.

       By  default,  hg	 email will prompt for a To or CC header if you do not
       supply one via configuration or the command  line.   You	 can  override
       this to never prompt by configuring an empty value:

       [email]
       cc =

       You  can	 control the default inclusion of an introduction message with
       the patchbomb.intro configuration option. The configuration  is	always
       overwritten by command line flags like --intro and --desc:

       [patchbomb]
       intro=auto   # include introduction message if more than 1 patch (default)
       intro=never  # never include an introduction message
       intro=always # always include an introduction message

       You  can	 specify a template for flags to be added in subject prefixes.
       Flags specified by --flag option are exported as {flags} keyword:

       [patchbomb]
       flagtemplate = "{separate(' ',
				 ifeq(branch, 'default', '', branch|upper),
				 flags)}"

       You can set patchbomb to always ask for confirmation by setting	patch‐
       bomb.confirm to true.

   Commands
   email
       send changesets by email:

       hg email [OPTION]... [DEST]...

       By  default,  diffs  are sent in the format generated by hg export, one
       per message. The series starts with a "[PATCH 0	of  N]"	 introduction,
       which describes the series as a whole.

       Each  patch email has a Subject line of "[PATCH M of N] ...", using the
       first line of the changeset description as the subject text.  The  mes‐
       sage contains two or three parts. First, the changeset description.

       With  the  -d/--diffstat	 option, if the diffstat program is installed,
       the result of running diffstat on the patch is inserted.

       Finally, the patch itself, as generated by hg export.

       With the -d/--diffstat or --confirm options, you will be presented with
       a  final	 summary of all messages and asked for confirmation before the
       messages are sent.

       By default the patch is included as text in the	email  body  for  easy
       reviewing.  Using the -a/--attach option will instead create an attach‐
       ment for the patch. With -i/--inline an inline attachment will be  cre‐
       ated.  You  can include a patch both as text in the email body and as a
       regular or  an  inline  attachment  by  combining  the  -a/--attach  or
       -i/--inline with the --body option.

       With  -B/--bookmark  changesets	reachable  by  the  given bookmark are
       selected.

       With -o/--outgoing, emails will be generated for patches not  found  in
       the  destination	 repository  (or only those which are ancestors of the
       specified revisions if any are provided)

       With -b/--bundle, changesets are selected as for --outgoing, but a sin‐
       gle email containing a binary Mercurial bundle as an attachment will be
       sent. Use the patchbomb.bundletype config option to control the	bundle
       type as with hg bundle --type.

       With -m/--mbox, instead of previewing each patchbomb message in a pager
       or sending the messages directly, it will create a  UNIX	 mailbox  file
       with the patch emails. This mailbox file can be previewed with any mail
       user agent which supports UNIX mbox files.

       With -n/--test, all steps will run, but mail will  not  be  sent.   You
       will  be	 prompted  for	an  email  recipient address, a subject and an
       introductory message describing the patches of  your  patchbomb.	  Then
       when all is done, patchbomb messages are displayed.

       In  case	 email	sending	 fails,	 you will find a backup of your series
       introductory message in .hg/last-email.txt.

       The default behavior of this command can be customized through configu‐
       ration. (See hg help patchbomb for details)

       Examples:

       hg email -r 3000		 # send patch 3000 only
       hg email -r 3000 -r 3001	 # send patches 3000 and 3001
       hg email -r 3000:3005	 # send patches 3000 through 3005
       hg email 3000		 # send patch 3000 (deprecated)

       hg email -o		 # send all patches not in default
       hg email -o DEST		 # send all patches not in DEST
       hg email -o -r 3000	 # send all ancestors of 3000 not in default
       hg email -o -r 3000 DEST	 # send all ancestors of 3000 not in DEST

       hg email -B feature	 # send all ancestors of feature bookmark

       hg email -b		 # send bundle of all patches not in default
       hg email -b DEST		 # send bundle of all patches not in DEST
       hg email -b -r 3000	 # bundle of all ancestors of 3000 not in default
       hg email -b -r 3000 DEST	 # bundle of all ancestors of 3000 not in DEST

       hg email -o -m mbox &&	 # generate an mbox file...
	 mutt -R -f mbox	 # ... and view it with mutt
       hg email -o -m mbox &&	 # generate an mbox file ...
	 formail -s sendmail \	 # ... and use formail to send from the mbox
	   -bm -t < mbox	 # ... using sendmail

       Before  using this command, you will need to enable email in your hgrc.
       See the [email] section in hgrc(5) for details.

       Options:

       -g, --git
	      use git extended diff format

       --plain
	      omit hg patch header

       -o, --outgoing
	      send changes not found in the target repository

       -b, --bundle
	      send changes not in target as a binary bundle

       -B,--bookmark <VALUE>
	      send changes only reachable by given bookmark

       --bundlename <NAME>
	      name of the bundle attachment file (default: bundle)

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      a revision to send

       --force
	      run even when remote repository is unrelated (with -b/--bundle)

       --base <REV[+]>
	      a base changeset to  specify  instead  of	 a  destination	 (with
	      -b/--bundle)

       --intro
	      send an introduction email for a single patch

       --body send patches as inline message text (default)

       -a, --attach
	      send patches as attachments

       -i, --inline
	      send patches as inline attachments

       --bcc <VALUE[+]>
	      email addresses of blind carbon copy recipients

       -c,--cc <VALUE[+]>
	      email addresses of copy recipients

       --confirm
	      ask for confirmation before sending

       -d, --diffstat
	      add diffstat output to messages

       --date <VALUE>
	      use the given date as the sending date

       --desc <VALUE>
	      use the given file as the series description

       -f,--from <VALUE>
	      email address of sender

       -n, --test
	      print messages that would be sent

       -m,--mbox <VALUE>
	      write messages to mbox file instead of sending them

       --reply-to <VALUE[+]>
	      email addresses replies should be sent to

       -s,--subject <VALUE>
	      subject of first message (intro or single patch)

       --in-reply-to <VALUE>
	      message identifier to reply to

       --flag <VALUE[+]>
	      flags to add in subject prefixes

       -t,--to <VALUE[+]>
	      email addresses of recipients

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
	      specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
	      specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
	      do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   purge
       command to delete untracked files from the working directory

   Commands
   purge
       removes files not tracked by Mercurial:

       hg purge [OPTION]... [DIR]...

       Delete  files  not known to Mercurial. This is useful to test local and
       uncommitted changes in an otherwise-clean source tree.

       This means that purge will delete the following by default:

       · Unknown files: files marked with "?" by hg status

       · Empty directories: in fact Mercurial ignores directories unless  they
	 contain files under source control management

       But it will leave untouched:

       · Modified and unmodified tracked files

       · Ignored files (unless --all is specified)

       · New files added to the repository (with hg add)

       The  --files  and  --dirs options can be used to direct purge to delete
       only files, only directories, or both. If neither option is given, both
       will be deleted.

       If  directories	are  given  on	the  command line, only files in these
       directories are considered.

       Be careful with purge, as you could irreversibly delete some files  you
       forgot  to add to the repository. If you only want to print the list of
       files that this program would delete, use the --print option.

       Options:

       -a, --abort-on-err
	      abort if an error occurs

       --all  purge ignored files too

       --dirs purge empty directories

       --files
	      purge files

       -p, --print
	      print filenames instead of deleting them

       -0, --print0
	      end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs (implies -p/--print)

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

	  aliases: clean

   rebase
       command to move sets of revisions to a different ancestor

       This extension lets you rebase  changesets  in  an  existing  Mercurial
       repository.

       For more information: https://mercurial-scm.org/wiki/RebaseExtension

   Commands
   rebase
       move changeset (and descendants) to a different branch:

       hg rebase [-s REV | -b REV] [-d REV] [OPTION]

       Rebase  uses repeated merging to graft changesets from one part of his‐
       tory (the source) onto another (the destination). This  can  be	useful
       for linearizing local changes relative to a master development tree.

       Published commits cannot be rebased (see hg help phases).  To copy com‐
       mits, see hg help graft.

       If you don't specify a destination changeset (-d/--dest),  rebase  will
       use  the	 same logic as hg merge to pick a destination.	if the current
       branch contains exactly one other head, the other head is  merged  with
       by  default.   Otherwise, an explicit revision with which to merge with
       must be provided.  (destination changeset is not modified by  rebasing,
       but new changesets are added as its descendants.)

       Here are the ways to select changesets:

	  1. Explicitly select them using --rev.

	  2. Use  --source  to	select a root changeset and include all of its
	     descendants.

	  3. Use --base to select a changeset; rebase will find ancestors  and
	     their  descendants	 which	are not also ancestors of the destina‐
	     tion.

	  4. If you do not specify any of --rev,  source,  or  --base,	rebase
	     will use --base . as above.

       Rebase will destroy original changesets unless you use --keep.  It will
       also move your bookmarks (even if you do).

       Some changesets may be dropped if they do not contribute changes	 (e.g.
       merges from the destination branch).

       Unlike  merge, rebase will do nothing if you are at the branch tip of a
       named branch with two heads. You will need to explicitly specify source
       and/or destination.

       If you need to use a tool to automate merge/conflict decisions, you can
       specify one with --tool, see hg help merge-tools.   As  a  caveat:  the
       tool  will  not be used to mediate when a file was deleted, there is no
       hook presently available for this.

       If a rebase is interrupted to manually resolve a conflict,  it  can  be
       continued with --continue/-c or aborted with --abort/-a.

       Examples:

       · move  "local changes" (current commit back to branching point) to the
	 current branch tip after a pull:

	 hg rebase

       · move a single changeset to the stable branch:

	 hg rebase -r 5f493448 -d stable

       · splice a commit and all its descendants onto another part of history:

	 hg rebase --source c0c3 --dest 4cf9

       · rebase everything on a branch marked by a bookmark onto  the  default
	 branch:

	 hg rebase --base myfeature --dest default

       · collapse a sequence of changes into a single commit:

	 hg rebase --collapse -r 1520:1525 -d .

       · move a named branch while preserving its name:

	 hg rebase -r "branch(featureX)" -d 1.3 --keepbranches

       Configuration Options:

       You can make rebase require a destination if you set the following con‐
       fig option:

       [commands]
       rebase.requiredest = True

       By default, rebase will close the transaction after  each  commit.  For
       performance purposes, you can configure rebase to use a single transac‐
       tion across the entire rebase. WARNING: This setting introduces a  sig‐
       nificant	 risk of losing the work you've done in a rebase if the rebase
       aborts unexpectedly:

       [rebase]
       singletransaction = True

       Return Values:

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if nothing to rebase or	there  are  unresolved
       conflicts.

       Options:

       -s,--source <REV>
	      rebase the specified changeset and descendants

       -b,--base <REV>
	      rebase everything from branching point of specified changeset

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      rebase these revisions

       -d,--dest <REV>
	      rebase onto the specified changeset

       --collapse
	      collapse the rebased changesets

       -m,--message <TEXT>
	      use text as collapse commit message

       -e, --edit
	      invoke editor on commit messages

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
	      read collapse commit message from file

       -k, --keep
	      keep original changesets

       --keepbranches
	      keep original branch names

       -D, --detach
	      (DEPRECATED)

       -i, --interactive
	      (DEPRECATED)

       -t,--tool <VALUE>
	      specify merge tool

       -c, --continue
	      continue an interrupted rebase

       -a, --abort
	      abort an interrupted rebase

       --style <STYLE>
	      display using template map file (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   record
       commands	 to  interactively  select changes for commit/qrefresh (DEPRE‐
       CATED)

       The feature provided by this extension has been moved into core	Mercu‐
       rial as hg commit --interactive.

   Commands
   qrecord
       interactively record a new patch:

       hg qrecord [OPTION]... PATCH [FILE]...

       See hg help qnew & hg help record for more information and usage.

   record
       interactively select changes to commit:

       hg record [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       If  a  list of files is omitted, all changes reported by hg status will
       be candidates for recording.

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       If using the text interface (see hg help config), you will be  prompted
       for whether to record changes to each modified file, and for files with
       multiple changes, for each change to use. For each query, the following
       responses are possible:

       y - record this change
       n - skip this change
       e - edit this change manually

       s - skip remaining changes to this file
       f - record remaining changes to this file

       d - done, skip remaining changes and files
       a - record all changes to all remaining files
       q - quit, recording no changes

       ? - display help

       This command is not available when committing a merge.

       Options:

       -A, --addremove
	      mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing

       --close-branch
	      mark a branch head as closed

       --amend
	      amend the parent of the working directory

       -s, --secret
	      use the secret phase for committing

       -e, --edit
	      invoke editor on commit messages

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       -m,--message <TEXT>
	      use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
	      read commit message from file

       -d,--date <DATE>
	      record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
	      record the specified user as committer

       -S, --subrepos
	      recurse into subrepositories

       -w, --ignore-all-space
	      ignore white space when comparing lines

       -b, --ignore-space-change
	      ignore changes in the amount of white space

       -B, --ignore-blank-lines
	      ignore changes whose lines are all blank

       -Z, --ignore-space-at-eol
	      ignore changes in whitespace at EOL

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   releasenotes
       generate release notes from commit messages (EXPERIMENTAL)

       It  is  common to maintain files detailing changes in a project between
       releases. Maintaining these files can be difficult and time  consuming.
       The  hg	releasenotes command  provided	by  this  extension  makes the
       process simpler by automating it.

   Commands
   releasenotes
       parse release notes from commit messages into an output file:

       hg releasenotes [-r REV] [-c] FILE

       Given an output file and set of revisions, this command will parse com‐
       mit messages for release notes then add them to the output file.

       Release notes are defined in commit messages as ReStructuredText direc‐
       tives. These have the form:

       .. directive:: title

	  content

       Each directive maps to an output section in a generated	release	 notes
       file,  which  itself is ReStructuredText. For example, the .. feature::
       directive would map to a New Features section.

       Release note directives can  be	either	short-form  or	long-form.  In
       short-  form,  title  is	 omitted and the release note is rendered as a
       bullet list. In long form, a sub-section with the title title is	 added
       to the section.

       The  FILE  argument  controls the output file to write gathered release
       notes to. The format of the file is:

       Section 1
       =========

       ...

       Section 2
       =========

       ...

       Only sections with defined release notes are emitted.

       If a section only has short-form notes, it will consist of bullet list:

       Section
       =======

       * Release note 1
       * Release note 2

       If a section has long-form notes, sub-sections will be emitted:

       Section
       =======

       Note 1 Title
       ------------

       Description of the first long-form note.

       Note 2 Title
       ------------

       Description of the second long-form note.

       If the FILE argument points to an existing  file,  that	file  will  be
       parsed  for  release notes having the format that would be generated by
       this command. The notes from the	 processed  commit  messages  will  be
       merged into this parsed set.

       During release notes merging:

       · Duplicate items are automatically ignored

       · Items	that are different are automatically ignored if the similarity
	 is greater than a threshold.

       This means that the release notes file  can  be	updated	 independently
       from this command and changes should not be lost when running this com‐
       mand on that file. A particular use case for this is to tweak the word‐
       ing  of	a  release  note  after it has been added to the release notes
       file.

       The -c/--check option checks the commit	message	 for  invalid  admoni‐
       tions.

       The  -l/--list option, presents the user with a list of existing avail‐
       able admonitions along with their title. This also includes the	custom
       admonitions (if any).

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV>
	      revisions to process for release notes

       -c, --check
	      checks for validity of admonitions (if any)

       -l, --list
	      list the available admonitions with their title

   relink
       recreates hardlinks between repository clones

   Commands
   relink
       recreate hardlinks between two repositories:

       hg relink [ORIGIN]

       When  repositories  are	cloned	locally,  their	 data  files  will  be
       hardlinked so that they only use the space of a single repository.

       Unfortunately, subsequent  pulls	 into  either  repository  will	 break
       hardlinks  for  any  files  touched by the new changesets, even if both
       repositories end up pulling the same changes.

       Similarly, passing --rev to "hg clone" will fail to use any  hardlinks,
       falling back to a complete copy of the source repository.

       This  command lets you recreate those hardlinks and reclaim that wasted
       space.

       This repository will be relinked to share space with ORIGIN, which must
       be   on	 the  same  local  disk.  If  ORIGIN  is  omitted,  looks  for
       "default-relink", then "default", in [paths].

       Do not attempt any read operations on this repository while the command
       is running. (Both repositories will be locked against writes.)

   schemes
       extend schemes with shortcuts to repository swarms

       This  extension	allows you to specify shortcuts for parent URLs with a
       lot of repositories to act like a scheme, for example:

       [schemes]
       py = http://code.python.org/hg/

       After that you can use it like:

       hg clone py://trunk/

       Additionally there is support for some more complex schemas, for	 exam‐
       ple used by Google Code:

       [schemes]
       gcode = http://{1}.googlecode.com/hg/

       The  syntax  is	taken from Mercurial templates, and you have unlimited
       number of variables, starting with {1} and continuing with {2}, {3} and
       so  on.	This variables will receive parts of URL supplied, split by /.
       Anything not specified as {part} will be just appended to an URL.

       For convenience, the extension adds these schemes by default:

       [schemes]
       py = http://hg.python.org/
       bb = https://bitbucket.org/
       bb+ssh = ssh://hg@bitbucket.org/
       gcode = https://{1}.googlecode.com/hg/
       kiln = https://{1}.kilnhg.com/Repo/

       You can override a predefined scheme by defining a new scheme with  the
       same name.

   Commands
   share
       share a common history between several working directories

   Automatic Pooled Storage for Clones
       When  this extension is active, hg clone can be configured to automati‐
       cally share/pool storage across multiple clones. This mode  effectively
       converts	 hg  clone to  hg clone + hg share.  The benefit of using this
       mode is the automatic management of store paths and intelligent pooling
       of related repositories.

       The following share. config options influence this feature:

       share.pool

	      Filesystem  path	where  shared  repository data will be stored.
	      When defined, hg clone will automatically use shared  repository
	      storage instead of creating a store inside each clone.

       share.poolnaming

	      How directory names in share.pool are constructed.

	      "identity" means the name is derived from the first changeset in
	      the repository. In this mode, different remotes share storage if
	      their  root/initial  changeset  is  identical. In this mode, the
	      local shared repository  is  an  aggregate  of  all  encountered
	      remote repositories.

	      "remote"	means the name is derived from the source repository's
	      path or URL. In this mode, storage is only shared if the path or
	      URL  requested  in  the  hg  clone command  matches exactly to a
	      repository that was cloned before.

	      The default naming mode is "identity".

   Commands
   share
       create a new shared repository:

       hg share [-U] [-B] SOURCE [DEST]

       Initialize a new repository and working directory that shares its  his‐
       tory (and optionally bookmarks) with another repository.

       Note   using  rollback  or  extensions that destroy/modify history (mq,
	      rebase, etc.)  can  cause	 considerable  confusion  with	shared
	      clones.  In particular, if two shared clones are both updated to
	      the same changeset, and one of them destroys that changeset with
	      rollback, the other clone will suddenly stop working: all opera‐
	      tions will fail with "abort: working directory has unknown  par‐
	      ent". The only known workaround is to use debugsetparents on the
	      broken clone to reset it to a changeset that still exists.

       Options:

       -U, --noupdate
	      do not create a working directory

       -B, --bookmarks
	      also share bookmarks

       --relative
	      point to source using a relative path (EXPERIMENTAL)

   unshare
       convert a shared repository to a normal one:

       hg unshare

       Copy the store data to the repo and remove the sharedpath data.

   shelve
       save and restore changes to the working directory

       The "hg shelve" command saves changes made to the working directory and
       reverts	those  changes,	 resetting  the	 working  directory to a clean
       state.

       Later on, the "hg unshelve" command restores the changes saved  by  "hg
       shelve".	 Changes  can  be  restored even after updating to a different
       parent, in which case Mercurial's merge machinery will resolve any con‐
       flicts if necessary.

       You  can	 have more than one shelved change outstanding at a time; each
       shelved change has a distinct name. For details, see the help  for  "hg
       shelve".

   Commands
   shelve
       save and set aside changes from the working directory:

       hg shelve [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Shelving	 takes	files that "hg status" reports as not clean, saves the
       modifications to a bundle (a shelved change), and reverts the files  so
       that their state in the working directory becomes clean.

       To restore these changes to the working directory, using "hg unshelve";
       this will work even if you switch to a different commit.

       When no files are specified, "hg shelve" saves all not-clean files.  If
       specific	 files	or  directories are named, only changes to those files
       are shelved.

       In bare shelve (when  no	 files	are  specified,	 without  interactive,
       include	and  exclude  option),	shelving  remembers information if the
       working directory was on newly created branch, in other	words  working
       directory was on different branch than its first parent. In this situa‐
       tion unshelving restores branch information to the working directory.

       Each shelved change has a name that makes it easier to find later.  The
       name  of	 a  shelved change defaults to being based on the active book‐
       mark, or if there is no active bookmark, the current named branch.   To
       specify a different name, use --name.

       To  see	a list of existing shelved changes, use the --list option. For
       each shelved change, this will print its name,  age,  and  description;
       use --patch or --stat for more details.

       To delete specific shelved changes, use --delete. To delete all shelved
       changes, use --cleanup.

       Options:

       -A, --addremove
	      mark new/missing files as added/removed before shelving

       -u, --unknown
	      store unknown files in the shelve

       --cleanup
	      delete all shelved changes

       --date <DATE>
	      shelve with the specified commit date

       -d, --delete
	      delete the named shelved change(s)

       -e, --edit
	      invoke editor on commit messages

       -l, --list
	      list current shelves

       -m,--message <TEXT>
	      use text as shelve message

       -n,--name <NAME>
	      use the given name for the shelved commit

       -p, --patch
	      show patch

       -i, --interactive
	      interactive mode, only works while creating a shelve

       --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   unshelve
       restore a shelved change to the working directory:

       hg unshelve [[-n] SHELVED]

       This command accepts an optional name of a shelved change  to  restore.
       If none is given, the most recent shelved change is used.

       If  a  shelved change is applied successfully, the bundle that contains
       the shelved changes is moved to a backup location (.hg/shelve-backup).

       Since you can restore a shelved change on top of an  arbitrary  commit,
       it  is  possible that unshelving will result in a conflict between your
       changes and the commits you are unshelving onto. If  this  occurs,  you
       must resolve the conflict, then use --continue to complete the unshelve
       operation. (The bundle will not be moved until  you  successfully  com‐
       plete the unshelve.)

       (Alternatively,	you can use --abort to abandon an unshelve that causes
       a conflict. This reverts the unshelved changes, and leaves  the	bundle
       in place.)

       If  bare	 shelved  change(when no files are specified, without interac‐
       tive, include and exclude option) was done on newly created  branch  it
       would restore branch information to the working directory.

       After a successful unshelve, the shelved changes are stored in a backup
       directory. Only the N most recent backups are kept. N  defaults	to  10
       but can be overridden using the shelve.maxbackups configuration option.

       Timestamp  in  seconds  is  used	 to decide order of backups. More than
       maxbackups backups are kept, if same timestamp prevents	from  deciding
       exact order of them, for safety.

       Options:

       -a, --abort
	      abort an incomplete unshelve operation

       -c, --continue
	      continue an incomplete unshelve operation

       -k, --keep
	      keep shelve after unshelving

       -n,--name <NAME>
	      restore shelved change with given name

       -t,--tool <VALUE>
	      specify merge tool

       --date <DATE>
	      set date for temporary commits (DEPRECATED)

   show
       unified command to show various repository information (EXPERIMENTAL)

       This  extension	provides the hg show command, which provides a central
       command for displaying commonly-accessed repository data and  views  of
       that data.

       The following config options can influence operation.

   commands
       show.aliasprefix

	      List  of	strings	 that  will register aliases for views. e.g. s
	      will effectively set config options alias.s<view> = show	<view>
	      for all views. i.e. hg swork would execute hg show work.

	      Aliases that would conflict with existing registrations will not
	      be performed.

   Commands
   show
       show various repository information:

       hg show VIEW

       A requested view of repository data is displayed.

       If no view is requested, the list of available views is shown  and  the
       command aborts.

       Note   There  are  no backwards compatibility guarantees for the output
	      of this command. Output  may  change  in	any  future  Mercurial
	      release.

	      Consumers	 wanting  stable  command output should specify a tem‐
	      plate via -T/--template.

       List of available views:

       bookmarks   bookmarks and their associated changeset

       stack	   current line of work

       work	   changesets that aren't finished

       Options:

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
	      display with template

   sparse
       allow sparse checkouts of the working directory (EXPERIMENTAL)

       (This extension is not yet protected by backwards compatibility guaran‐
       tees.  Any  aspect  may	break  in future releases until this notice is
       removed.)

       This extension allows the working directory to only consist of a subset
       of files for the revision. This allows specific files or directories to
       be explicitly included or excluded.  Many  repository  operations  have
       performance  proportional  to the number of files in the working direc‐
       tory. So only realizing a subset of files in the working directory  can
       improve performance.

   Sparse Config Files
       The  set	 of  files that are part of a sparse checkout are defined by a
       sparse config file. The file  defines  3	 things:  includes  (files  to
       include	in  the	 sparse checkout), excludes (files to exclude from the
       sparse checkout), and profiles (links to other config files).

       The file format is newline delimited. Empty lines and  lines  beginning
       with # are ignored.

       Lines  beginning	 with %include `` denote another sparse config file to
       include. e.g. ``%include tests.sparse. The filename is relative to  the
       repository root.

       The  special  lines  [include]  and  [exclude]  denote  the section for
       includes and excludes that follow, respectively. It is illegal to  have
       [include] after [exclude].

       Non-special lines resemble file patterns to be added to either includes
       or excludes. The syntax of these lines is documented by	hg  help  pat‐
       terns.	Patterns are interpreted as glob: by default and match against
       the root of the repository.

       Exclusion patterns take precedence over inclusion patterns. So even  if
       a file is explicitly included, an [exclude] entry can remove it.

       For  example,  say you have a repository with 3 directories, frontend/,
       backend/, and tools/. frontend/ and backend/  correspond	 to  different
       projects	 and  it  is  uncommon	for someone working on one to need the
       files for the other. But tools/	contains  files	 shared	 between  both
       projects. Your sparse config files may resemble:

       # frontend.sparse
       frontend/**
       tools/**

       # backend.sparse
       backend/**
       tools/**

       Say the backend grows in size. Or there's a directory with thousands of
       files you wish to exclude. You can modify the profile to	 exclude  cer‐
       tain files:

       [include]
       backend/**
       tools/**

       [exclude]
       tools/tests/**

   Commands
   strip
       strip changesets and their descendants from history

       This extension allows you to strip changesets and all their descendants
       from the repository. See the command help for details.

   Commands
   strip
       strip changesets and all their descendants from the repository:

       hg strip [-k] [-f] [-B bookmark] [-r] REV...

       The strip command  removes  the	specified  changesets  and  all	 their
       descendants.  If	 the  working  directory  has uncommitted changes, the
       operation is aborted unless the --force flag is supplied, in which case
       changes will be discarded.

       If  a  parent  of  the  working directory is stripped, then the working
       directory will automatically be updated to the  most  recent  available
       ancestor of the stripped parent after the operation completes.

       Any stripped changesets are stored in .hg/strip-backup as a bundle (see
       hg help bundle and hg help unbundle). They can be restored  by  running
       hg  unbundle  .hg/strip-backup/BUNDLE,  where BUNDLE is the bundle file
       created by the strip. Note that the local revision numbers will in gen‐
       eral be different after the restore.

       Use the --no-backup option to discard the backup bundle once the opera‐
       tion completes.

       Strip is not a history-rewriting operation and can be used  on  change‐
       sets  in	 the  public  phase.  But if the stripped changesets have been
       pushed to a remote repository you will likely pull them again.

       Return 0 on success.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
	      strip specified revision (optional, can specify revisions	 with‐
	      out this option)

       -f, --force
	      force  removal  of  changesets,  discard uncommitted changes (no
	      backup)

       --no-backup
	      no backups

       --nobackup
	      no backups (DEPRECATED)

       -n     ignored  (DEPRECATED)

       -k, --keep
	      do not modify working directory during strip

       -B,--bookmark <VALUE[+]>
	      remove revs only reachable from given bookmark

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   transplant
       command to transplant changesets from another branch

       This extension allows you to transplant changes to another parent revi‐
       sion,  possibly	in  another  repository.  The transplant is done using
       'diff' patches.

       Transplanted patches are recorded in .hg/transplant/transplants,	 as  a
       map from a changeset hash to its hash in the source repository.

   Commands
   transplant
       transplant changesets from another branch:

       hg transplant [-s REPO] [-b BRANCH [-a]] [-p REV] [-m REV] [REV]...

       Selected	 changesets  will  be  applied	on  top of the current working
       directory with the log of the original changeset.  The  changesets  are
       copied and will thus appear twice in the history with different identi‐
       ties.

       Consider using the graft command	 if  everything	 is  inside  the  same
       repository  - it will use merges and will usually give a better result.
       Use the rebase extension if the changesets are unpublished and you want
       to move them instead of copying them.

       If --log is specified, log messages will have a comment appended of the
       form:

       (transplanted from CHANGESETHASH)

       You can rewrite the changelog message with the  --filter	 option.   Its
       argument	 will  be invoked with the current changelog message as $1 and
       the patch as $2.

       --source/-s specifies another repository to use for  selecting  change‐
       sets,  just  as	if  it temporarily had been pulled.  If --branch/-b is
       specified, these revisions will be used as heads	 when  deciding	 which
       changesets  to  transplant,  just  as  if only these revisions had been
       pulled.	If --all/-a is specified, all the revisions up	to  the	 heads
       specified with --branch will be transplanted.

       Example:

       · transplant all changes up to REV on top of your current revision:

	 hg transplant --branch REV --all

       You  can	 optionally  mark  selected  transplanted  changesets as merge
       changesets. You will not be prompted to transplant any ancestors	 of  a
       merged  transplant,  and	 you  can  merge  descendants of them normally
       instead of transplanting them.

       Merge changesets may be transplanted directly by specifying the	proper
       parent changeset by calling hg transplant --parent.

       If  no  merges  or  revisions are provided, hg transplant will start an
       interactive changeset browser.

       If a changeset application fails, you can fix the  merge	 by  hand  and
       then resume where you left off by calling hg transplant --continue/-c.

       Options:

       -s,--source <REPO>
	      transplant changesets from REPO

       -b,--branch <REV[+]>
	      use this source changeset as head

       -a, --all
	      pull all changesets up to the --branch revisions

       -p,--prune <REV[+]>
	      skip over REV

       -m,--merge <REV[+]>
	      merge at REV

       --parent <REV>
	      parent to choose when transplanting merge

       -e, --edit
	      invoke editor on commit messages

       --log  append transplant info to log message

       -c, --continue
	      continue last transplant session after fixing conflicts

       --filter <CMD>
	      filter changesets through command

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   uncommit
       uncommit part or all of a local changeset (EXPERIMENTAL)

       This  command  undoes  the  effect  of  a  local	 commit, returning the
       affected files to their uncommitted state. This means that files	 modi‐
       fied,  added or removed in the changeset will be left unchanged, and so
       will remain modified, added and removed in the working directory.

   Commands
   uncommit
       uncommit part or all of a local changeset:

       hg uncommit [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       This command undoes  the	 effect	 of  a	local  commit,	returning  the
       affected	 files to their uncommitted state. This means that files modi‐
       fied or deleted in the changeset will be left unchanged,	 and  so  will
       remain modified in the working directory.

       Options:

       --keep allow an empty commit after uncommiting

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
	      include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
	      exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   win32mbcs
       allow the use of MBCS paths with problematic encodings

       Some MBCS encodings are not good for some path operations (i.e.	split‐
       ting path, case conversion, etc.) with its encoded bytes. We call  such
       a  encoding  (i.e. shift_jis and big5) as "problematic encoding".  This
       extension can be used to fix the issue with those encodings by wrapping
       some functions to convert to Unicode string before path operation.

       This extension is useful for:

       · Japanese Windows users using shift_jis encoding.

       · Chinese Windows users using big5 encoding.

       · All  users  who use a repository with one of problematic encodings on
	 case-insensitive file system.

       This extension is not needed for:

       · Any user who use only ASCII chars in path.

       · Any user who do not use any of problematic encodings.

       Note that there are some limitations on using this extension:

       · You should use single encoding in one repository.

       · If the repository path ends with 0x5c, .hg/hgrc cannot be read.

       · win32mbcs is not compatible with fixutf8 extension.

       By default, win32mbcs uses encoding.encoding decided by Mercurial.  You
       can specify the encoding by config option:

       [win32mbcs]
       encoding = sjis

       It is useful for the users who want to commit with UTF-8 log message.

   win32text
       perform automatic newline conversion (DEPRECATED)

	  Deprecation: The win32text extension requires each user to configure
	  the extension again and again for each clone since the configuration
	  is not copied when cloning.

	  We  have  therefore  made  the eol as an alternative. The eol uses a
	  version controlled file for its configuration and  each  clone  will
	  therefore use the right settings from the start.

       To perform automatic newline conversion, use:

       [extensions]
       win32text =
       [encode]
       ** = cleverencode:
       # or ** = macencode:

       [decode]
       ** = cleverdecode:
       # or ** = macdecode:

       If  not	doing  conversion,  to	make sure you do not commit CRLF/CR by
       accident:

       [hooks]
       pretxncommit.crlf = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcrlf
       # or pretxncommit.cr = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcr

       To do the same check on a server to prevent CRLF/CR from	 being	pushed
       or pulled:

       [hooks]
       pretxnchangegroup.crlf = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcrlf
       # or pretxnchangegroup.cr = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcr

   zeroconf
       discover and advertise repositories on the local network

       The zeroconf extension will advertise hg serve instances over DNS-SD so
       that they can be discovered using the hg paths command without  knowing
       the server's address.

       To allow other people to discover your repository using run hg serve in
       your repository:

       $ cd test
       $ hg serve

       You can discover Zeroconf-enabled repositories by running hg paths:

       $ hg paths
       zc-test = http://example.com:8000/test

FILES
       /etc/mercurial/hgrc, $HOME/.hgrc, .hg/hgrc

	      This  file  contains  defaults  and  configuration.  Values   in
	      .hg/hgrc	override those in $HOME/.hgrc, and these override set‐
	      tings made in the global /etc/mercurial/hgrc configuration.  See
	      hgrc(5) for details of the contents and format of these files.

       .hgignore

	      This  file  contains  regular  expressions  (one	per line) that
	      describe file names that should be ignored by hg.	 For  details,
	      see hgignore(5).

       .hgsub

	      This  file  defines  the	locations  of all subrepositories, and
	      tells where the subrepository checkouts came from. For  details,
	      see hg help subrepos.

       .hgsubstate

	      This  file  is  where  Mercurial	stores	all  nested repository
	      states. NB: This file should not be edited manually.

       .hgtags

	      This file contains changeset hash values and text tag names (one
	      of  each separated by spaces) that correspond to tagged versions
	      of the repository contents. The file content  is	encoded	 using
	      UTF-8.

       .hg/last-message.txt

	      This  file  is used by hg commit to store a backup of the commit
	      message in case the commit fails.

       .hg/localtags

	      This file can be used to define local tags which are not	shared
	      among  repositories. The file format is the same as for .hgtags,
	      but it is encoded using the local system encoding.

       Some commands (e.g. revert) produce backup files ending	in  .orig,  if
       the  .orig file already exists and is not tracked by Mercurial, it will
       be overwritten.

BUGS
       Probably lots, please post them to  the	mailing	 list  (see  Resources
       below) when you find them.

SEE ALSO
       hgignore(5), hgrc(5)

AUTHOR
       Written by Matt Mackall <mpm@selenic.com>

RESOURCES
       Main Web Site: https://mercurial-scm.org/

       Source code repository: https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg

       Mailing list: https://www.mercurial-scm.org/mailman/listinfo/mercurial/

COPYING
       Copyright (C) 2005-2017 Matt Mackall.  Free use	of  this  software  is
       granted	under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 or
       any later version.

AUTHOR
       Matt Mackall <mpm@selenic.com>

       Organization: Mercurial

									 HG(1)
[top]

List of man pages available for Kali

Copyright (c) for man pages and the logo by the respective OS vendor.

For those who want to learn more, the polarhome community provides shell access and support.

[legal] [privacy] [GNU] [policy] [cookies] [netiquette] [sponsors] [FAQ]
Tweet
Polarhome, production since 1999.
Member of Polarhome portal.
Based on Fawad Halim's script.
....................................................................
Vote for polarhome
Free Shell Accounts :: the biggest list on the net